3-079-467-13 (1)
Digital
Video Camera Recorder
Video Camera Recorder
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,
and retain it for future reference.
Owner’s Record
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.
Model No.
Serial No.
-TRV
Model No. AC-
Serial No.
TM
SERIES
DCR-TRV350
DCR-TRV150/TRV250/TRV350/TRV351
CCD-TRV118/TRV318/TRV418
©2003 Sony Corporation
We lco m e !
Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Handycam. With your Handycam, you can
capture life’s precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Handycam is
loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be
producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.
If you have any questions about this product,
you may call:
Sony Customer Information Center 1-800-222-
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do
not expose the unit to rain or
moisture.
SONY (7669)
The number below is for the FCC related
matters only.
Regulatory Information
Fo r t h e cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.
De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y
Trade Name:
Model No.:
SONY
DCR-TRV150,
DCR-TRV250
Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc.
Address:
680 Kinderkamack
Road, Oradell,
NJ07649 U.S.A.
201-930-6972
Telephone No.:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This symbol is intended to
alert the user to the presence
of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y
Trade Name:
Model No.:
SONY
DCR-TRV350
Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc.
Address:
680 Kinderkamack
Road, Oradell,
NJ07649 U.S.A.
201-930-6972
Telephone No.:
This symbol is intended to
alert the user to the presence
of important operating and
maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
2
Note:
Fo r t h e cu st o m e rs in t h e
U.S.A. a n d CANADA
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
CAUTION
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES
Lithium-Ion batteries are
recyclable.
You can help preserve our
environment by returning
your used rechargeable
batteries to the collection and
recycling location nearest you.
For more information regarding recycling of
rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-
8837, or visit http:/ / www.rbrc.org/ .
—
—
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking
Lithium-Ion batteries.
—
—
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/ TV technician for help.
The supplied interface cable must be used with
the equipment in order to comply with the
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
3
Ma in Fe a t u re s
On t h e m o d e l n a m e in d ica t io n
In this manual, camcorder-shape icons are used to indicate model names.
CCD-TRV118 :
CCD-TRV318 :
CCD-TRV418 :
DCR-TRV150 :
DCR-TRV250 :
DCR-TRV350 :
DCR-TRV351 :
Instructions with no icons are for all models.
Instructions with icons are for the indicated models only.
Before you start reading this manual, check the model name of your camcorder.
On t h e t a p e
Re co rd in g m o vin g o r st ill
im a g e s, a n d p la yin g t h e m
b a ck
• Recording moving pictures (p. 30)
• Recording still images
(p. 56)
• Playing back a tape (p. 45)
On t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”
b
• Recording still images (p. 132)
• Recording moving pictures (p. 146)
• Viewing still images (p. 163)
• Viewing moving pictures (p. 166)
• Viewing pictures recorded on a tape or live
from your camcorder on your computer
– USB Streaming (p. 183)
• Capturing images on your computer from
your camcorder using the USB cable (p. 197)
• Viewing images recorded on a “Memory
Stick” using the USB cable
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n yo u r
co m p u t e r
(p. 185)
• Converting an analog signal into digital to
capture images onto your computer
(p. 208)
4
Ma in Fe a t u re s
Ot h e r u se s
Functions for adjusting exposure in the recording mode
• BACK LIGHT (p. 38)
• NightShot (p. 39)
• Super NightShot/ Color Slow Shutter
• PROGRAM AE (p. 68)
(p. 39, 40)
• Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 70)
• Built-in light (p. 79)
Functions for giving images more impact
• Digital zoom (p. 34) The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 20×,
select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings.)
• Fader (p. 61)
• Picture effect (In recording mode) (p. 64)
• Digital effect (In recording mode)
• Title (p. 75, 77)
(p. 65)
• MEMORY MIX
(p. 140)
Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings
• SPORTS (p. 68)
• LANDSCAPE (p. 68)
• Manual focus (p. 71)
Functions for use on recorded tapes
• END SEARCH (p. 43)
• EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review
• DATA CODE
• Tape PB ZOOM
• ZERO SET MEMORY
• Easy Dubbing
(p. 43)
(p. 89)
(p. 47)
(p. 87)
(p. 98)
• Digital program editing
(p. 106)
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not
made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.
5
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s
Main Features .......................................... 4
Checking supplied accessories .............. 9
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g
Op e ra t io n s
Recording still images on a “Memory
Stick” while recording on a tape
...................................... 53
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e
– Recording on a tape ........................... 10
– Recording on a “Memory Stick”
...................................... 12
Recording still images on a tape
– Tape Photo recording
...................................... 56
Using the wide mode ........................... 58
Using the fader function ...................... 61
Ge t t in g St a rt e d
Using this manual ................................. 14
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ... 18
Installing the battery pack ............. 18
Charging the battery pack ............. 19
Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 24
Step 2 Setting the date and time ........ 26
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ................... 28
Using special effects
– Picture effect ................................. 64
Using special effects
– Digital effect
........... 65
Using the PROGRAM AE function .... 68
Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 70
Focusing manually ................................ 71
Interval recording
................ 72
Re co rd in g – Ba sics
Frame by frame recording
– Frame recording
................ 74
Recording a picture ............................... 30
Shooting a backlit subject
– BACK LIGHT ........................ 38
Superimposing a title ........................... 75
Making your own titles ........................ 77
Using the built-in light ......................... 79
Shooting in the dark
– NightShot
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
............................ 39
Inserting a scene
.............. 82
Self-timer recording
............................... 41
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck
Op e ra t io n s
Superimposing the date and time
on pictures
Playing back a tape with picture
effects
.... 83
.................... 42
Playing back a tape with digital
Checking recordings
– END SEARCH
– EDITSEARCH
effects
.......................... 85
Enlarging recorded images
– Tape PB ZOOM
...... 87
– Rec Review
............. 43
Quickly locating a scene
– ZERO SET MEMORY
Pla yb a ck – Ba sics
........................... 89
Playing back a tape ............................... 45
Searching for a recording by date
To display the screen indicators
– Display function ................... 47
– DATE SEARCH
........................... 90
Viewing recordings on TV................... 51
Searching for a photo
– PHOTO SEARCH/
PHOTO SCAN
..................... 92
6
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s
Ed it in g
– Pla yb a ck
Dubbing a tape ...................................... 94
Viewing still images
– Memory Photo playback .......... 163
Dubbing a tape easily – Easy Dubbing
........................... 98
Viewing moving pictures
– MPEG movie playback ............. 166
Dubbing only desired scenes
– Digital program editing (on tapes)
.............. 106
Selecting a folder to view ................... 169
Copying images recorded on a
Recording video or TV programs
.............. 119
“Memory Stick” to a tape ............ 170
Enlarging still images recorded on a
“Memory Stick”
Inserting a scene from a VCR
– Insert Editing
– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 172
......................... 123
Playing back images continuously
– SLIDE SHOW ............................. 174
Preventing accidental erasure
“ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s
– Re co rd in g
– Image protection ........................ 176
Deleting images – DELETE ............... 177
Writing a print mark
Using a “Memory Stick”
– PRINT MARK ............................ 180
– Introduction ............................... 126
Recording still images on a “Memory
Stick”
Vie w in g Im a g e s o n Yo u r
Co m p u t e r
– Memory Photo recording ......... 132
Recording images from a tape as still
images ............................................ 136
Viewing images on your computer
– Introduction
Superimposing a still image in the
“Memory Stick” on an image
.............. 182
Connecting your camcorder to your
computer using the USB cable
......... 187
– MEMORY MIX .......................... 140
Recording moving pictures on a
“Memory Stick”
Viewing pictures recorded on a tape
or live from your camcorder on
your computer – USB Streaming
......... 197
– MPEG movie recording ............ 146
Recording pictures from a tape as a
moving picture ............................. 150
Interval Photo recording .................... 154
Viewing images recorded on a
“Memory Stick” on your computer
.................... 202
Recording edited pictures as a moving
picture – Digital program editing
(on a “Memory Stick”) ................. 156
Connecting your camcorder to your
computer using the USB cable
................... 205
Setting up a folder ............................... 160
Viewing images recorded on a
“Memory Stick” on your computer
................... 207
Capturing images from an analog video
unit on your computer – Signal
convert function
...... 208
7
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s
•
,
and are trademarks.
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r
• i.LINK and are trademarks.
• “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
Changing the menu settings .............. 210
• “Memory Stick,”
Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
and “MagicGate
Tro u b le sh o o t in g
Types of trouble and how to correct
trouble ............................................ 224
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• Windows and Windows Media are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/ or other countries.
Self-diagnosis display ......................... 232
Warning indicators and messages .... 233
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n
• Pentium is trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation.
About video cassette ........................... 237
About the “Memory Stick” ................ 240
• Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are
trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.
• All other product names mentioned herein
may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not
mentioned in each case in this manual.
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery
pack ................................................ 242
About i.LINK ....................................... 244
Using your camcorder abroad .......... 246
Maintenance information and
precautions .................................... 247
Specifications ....................................... 253
Qu ick Re fe re n ce
Identifying parts and controls ........... 256
Index ..................................................... 267
8
Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.
1
3
7
2
5
9
or
RMT-814
RMT-708
4
8
6
Stereo
or
Monaural
q;
1 Wireless Remote Commander (1)
5 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 51, 94, 95)
Stereo:
(p. 264)
RMT-814:
RMT-708:
Monaural:
6 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 256)
7 Lens cap (1) (p. 30)
2 AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor (1), Pow er
cord (1) (p. 19)
8 USB cable (1)
(p. 182)
3 NP-FM30 Rechargeable Battery Pack
(1) (p. 18, 19)
9 CD-ROM (SPVD-010 USB Driver) (1)
(p. 189)
4 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote
Commander (2)
0 “Memory Stick” (1)
(p. 240)
(p. 264)
9
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a t a p e
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a
tape of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses “( )” for
more information.
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 24)
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 18).
Open the DC IN
jack cover.
Connect the plug with
its v mark facing up.
Power cord
AC Adaptor (supplied)
In se rt in g a ca sse t t e (p . 28)
1Slide
OPEN/
EJECT in the direction
of the arrow and open
the lid.
2Push the center of the
3Close the cassette
cassette back and
insert the cassette
properly with the
cassette window
facing up.
compartment by
pressing
on the
cassette compartment.
After the cassette
compartment goes
down completely,
close the lid.
10
Re co rd in g a p ict u re (p . 30)
2Set the POWER switch
to CAMERA while
pressing the small
green button.
1Remove the lens cap.
The cap is not attached when you
purchase your camcorder.
3Open the LCD
panel while
pressing OPEN.
The picture appears
on the LCD screen.
4Press START/ STOP. Your
camcorder starts
recording. To stop
recording, press START/
STOP again.
View finder
View a picture placing your eye against this part
when the LCD panel is closed (p. 32).
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight (p. 35).
The picture in the viewfinder is black and white.
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock is not set up yet. If you want to record the date and
time for a picture, set the clock before recording (p. 26).
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD
scre e n (p . 45)
2Press m to rewind the tape.
REW
3Press N to start playback.
PLAY
1Set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER
R
while pressing the small green button.*
Note
Do not pick up your camcorder by
the viewfinder, the LCD panel, or the
battery pack.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
11
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a
“Memory Stick” of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses
“( )” for more information.
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 24)
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 18).
Open the DC IN
jack cover.
Connect the plug with its v
mark facing up.
Power cord
AC Adaptor (supplied)
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 127)
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the b mark
facing the LCD panel as illustrated.
“Memory Stick” slot
b mark
When ejecting the “Memory
Stick,” press the “Memory Stick”
once lightly.
12
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 132)
2Set the POWER switch to
MEMORY while pressing the
small green button. Make sure
that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
1Remove the lens cap.
The cap is not attached when you
purchase your camcorder.
3Open the
LCD panel
while
LOCK switch
R
pressing
OPEN. The
picture
appears on
the screen.
4Press PHOTO
lightly.
5Press PHOTO
View finder
deeper.
View a picture placing your eye against this
part when the LCD panel is closed (p. 32).
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight
(p. 35).
The picture in the viewfinder is black and
white.
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock is not set up yet. If you want to record the date and
time for a picture, set the clock before recording (p. 26).
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e s o n t h e LCD
scre e n (p . 163)
1Set the POWER switch to
MEMORY or VCR while
pressing the small green
button.
2Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is
displayed.
PLAY
Press MEMORY +/ – to select the desired image.
Note
Do not pick up your camcorder by
the viewfinder, the LCD panel or
the battery pack.
13
— Ge t t in g St a rt e d —
Usin g t h is m a n u a l
The instructions in this manual are for the seven models listed in the table below.
Before you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model
number by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV350 is the model
used for illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the
illustrations. Any differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example,
“
.”
As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in
capital letters.
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is
being carried out.
Types of differences
Model
Recording system
Playback system
AUDIO/ VIDEO jack
S VIDEO jack
DV jack
Hi8
Hi8/ 8
OUT
OUT
—
Hi8
Hi8/ 8
OUT
OUT
—
Hi8
Hi8/ 8
OUT
OUT
—
Digital8 Digital8
Digital8
Digital8 Digital8 Digital8/ Hi8/ 8
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN/ OUT
IN/ OUT
IN/ OUT IN/ OUT
IN/ OUT
USB jack
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
“Memory Stick” slot
LANC jack
—
—
—
—
—
—
SteadyShot
—
z
z
Remote sensor
RFU jack
—
—
z
—
—
—
z
z
z
MIC jack
—
—
—
z Provided
— Not provided
14
Usin g t h is m a n u a l
Be fo re u sin g yo u r ca m co rd e r
With your camcorder, you can use the tapes and record/ playback on the systems
below. To enable smooth transition, we recommend that you do not mix pictures
recorded in the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm with the Digital8 system on a tape.
1)
Usable cassette tapes
Recording system
Hi8
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm
*
Digital8
Digital8
2)
Playback system *
Hi8
Standard 8 mm
1)
Usable cassette tapes
Recording system
Playback system
Hi8
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm
*
Digital8
Digital8
Usable cassette tapes
Recording system
Hi8
Hi8
Hi8
Standard 8 mm
Standard 8 mm
Standard 8 mm
3)
*
2)
Playback system *
1)
* If you use standard 8 mm tape, be sure to play back the tape on your camcorder.
Mosaic noise may appear when you play back standard 8 mm tape on other VCRs
(including another DCR-TRV150/ TRV250/ TRV350/ TRV351).
2)
* When you play back a tape, the Hi8
system or standard 8 mm system is
automatically detected and the playback system automatically switches to.
3)
* If you record on a Hi8
video cassette in the LP mode, recording is carried out in
the standard 8 mm system.
No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s
TV color systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you
need an NTSC system-based TV.
Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s
Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the
copyright laws.
15
Usin g t h is m a n u a l
No t e o n co n n e ct in g o t h e r e q u ip m e n t
When you connect your camcorder to other video equipment or a computer using the
USB cable or i.LINK cable, observe the shape of the jack.
If you forcibly insert the plug, the jack may be damaged and they may result in a
malfunction of your camcorder.
On t h e m o d e l n a m e in d ica t io n
In this manual, camcorder-shape icons are used to indicate model names.
CCD-TRV118 :
CCD-TRV318 :
CCD-TRV418 :
DCR-TRV150 :
DCR-TRV250 :
DCR-TRV350 :
DCR-TRV351 :
Instructions with no icons are for all models.
Instructions with icons are for the indicated models only.
Before you start reading this manual, check the model name of your camcorder.
On t h e POWER sw it ch
Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models.
Consider this when following the operating instructions.
VCR
:
:
e.g. Set the POWER switch to VCR.
or
PLAYER
e.g. Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
R
POWER
OFF (CHG) : Common to all models
e.g. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
A
CAMERA : Common to all models
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
MEMORY :
e.g. Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.
16
Usin g t h is m a n u a l
Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re
Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r
• The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision
technology so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.
How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,
blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.
These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the
recording in any w ay.
• Do not let your camcorder become wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea
water. Letting your camcorder become wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.
Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].
• Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a
car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].
• Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD
screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause
malfunctions [c].
• Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.
Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
[d ]
17
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
In st a llin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.
1
2
To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing the
BATT (battery) release lever down.
BATT (battery)
release lever
If you install the large-capacity battery pack
If you install the NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D battery pack
on your camcorder, extend the viewfinder.
18
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.
Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series).
See page 242 for details of “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC Adaptor supplied with your
camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug’s v mark facing up.
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC Adaptor.
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
The charge lamp lights up when charging begins.
4
BATT INFO
1
2
19
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
To check the state of the battery (BATTERY INFO)
Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN, then press BATT INFO.
The BATTERY INFO is displayed for about seven seconds.
The battery charge level is displayed as percentage and recordable
BATTERY INFO
time with the LCD screen/ viewfinder.
The battery charge level is displayed in 10% increments.
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL
0%
50%
100%
REC TIME AVAILABLE
LCD SCREEN: 56 min
VIEWFINDER: 73 min
Charging
j
When the battery is fully charged, the battery charge level
indicator shows 100% and the charge lamp goes out.
BATTERY INFO
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL
0%
50%
100%
REC TIME AVAILABLE
LCD SCREEN: 80 min
VIEWFINDER: 105 min
Full charge
Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
Disconnect the AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.
Until the remaining battery charge is calculated
The battery charge level indicator moves flashing and
BATTERY INFO
“CALCULATING BATTERY INFO...” is displayed.
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL
0%
50%
100%
CALCULATING
BATTERY INFO...
Note
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts on the DC plug
of the AC Adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC Adaptor.
When you use the AC Adaptor
Place the AC Adaptor near a wall outlet. If any trouble occurs with this unit, disconnect
the plug from the wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.
The numeric value displayed in the BATTERY INFO
Refer to the value displayed in the BATTERY INFO as a rough standard.
To display the BATTERY INFO longer
Press BATT INFO again while the BATTERY INFO is still displayed. The information is
displayed for another seven seconds.
If you keep pressing BATT INFO, the BATTERY INFO is displayed for up to about 20
seconds.
The BATTERY INFO is not displayed in the follow ing cases:
– The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).
– The battery pack is not installed properly.
– The battery pack is fully discharged.
20
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
If the pow er goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that
the battery pack has enough pow er to operate
Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication is correct.
What is “InfoLITHIUM”?
The “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack that can exchange data such as
battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible
with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with
the “InfoLITHIUM” battery. “InfoLITHIUM” M series battery packs have the
mark (p. 242).
TM
SERIES
Ch a rg in g t im e
Battery pack
Full charge
145
NP-FM30 (supplied)
NP-FM50
150
NP-FM70
240
NP-QM71/ QM71D
NP-FM90
260
330
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D
360
Approximate minutes to charge an empty battery pack at 25°C (77°F).
The charging time may increase if the battery’s temperature is extremely high or low
because of the ambient temperature.
21
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Re co rd in g t im e
Recording w ith
the view finder
Recording w ith
the LCD screen
Battery pack
Continuous
Typical*
50
Continuous
Typical*
40
NP-FM30 (supplied)
NP-FM50
105
170
355
415
540
625
80
85
130
270
315
410
475
70
NP-FM70
175
145
NP-QM71/ QM71D
NP-FM90
205
165
270
215
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D
310
250
Recording w ith
the view finder
Recording w ith
the LCD screen
Battery pack
Continuous
Typical*
55
Continuous
Typical*
40
NP-FM30 (supplied)
NP-FM50
115
185
385
445
580
670
85
90
140
295
340
450
520
70
NP-FM70
190
145
NP-QM71/ QM71D
NP-FM90
220
165
285
220
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D
330
255
Recording w ith
the view finder
Recording w ith
the LCD screen
Battery pack
Continuous
Typical*
80
Continuous
Typical*
60
NP-FM30 (supplied)
NP-FM50
165
265
540
640
820
955
120
195
400
465
600
695
130
100
NP-FM70
265
205
NP-QM71/ QM71D
NP-FM90
315
235
400
305
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D
465
355
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery
* Approximate recording time.
The actual battery life may be shorter in the following cases:
– When you repeat recording start/ stop, zooming and turning the power on/ off.
– When the battery is used repeatedly or self-discharged after charging (p. 242).
22
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Pla yin g t im e
Playing on
Battery pack
Playing w ith
the LCD closed
the LCD screen
NP-FM30 (supplied)
NP-FM50
80
120
195
400
465
600
695
135
285
335
435
505
NP-FM70
NP-QM71/ QM71D
NP-FM90
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D
Playing on
the LCD screen
Playing w ith
the LCD closed
Battery pack
NP-FM30 (supplied)
NP-FM50
90
130
210
430
505
655
755
150
310
365
475
550
NP-FM70
NP-QM71/ QM71D
NP-FM90
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D
Playing on
the LCD screen
Playing w ith
the LCD closed
Battery pack
NP-FM30 (supplied)
NP-FM50
120
195
400
465
600
695
175
280
570
675
865
1010
NP-FM70
NP-QM71/ QM71D
NP-FM90
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery
23
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Note
Approximate continuous playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery life will be shorter if
you use your camcorder in a cold environment.
Playback time
The table shows the playing time for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system.
The playing time of tapes recorded in the Hi8
by about 20%.
/ standard 8 mm system is reduced
You can charge the battery in other countries
For details, see page 246.
Recommended charging temperature
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).
Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t
When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a
wall outlet using the AC Adaptor.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover, and connect the AC Adaptor to the DC IN jack on
your camcorder with the plug’s v mark facing up.
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC Adaptor.
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.
2, 3
1
24
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
PRECAUTION
The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (house current) as long as it is
connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.
Notes
• The AC Adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your
camcorder.
• The DC IN jack has “source priority.” This means that the battery pack cannot supply
any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power
cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.
• Place the AC Adaptor near a wall outlet.
While using the AC Adaptor, if any trouble occurs with this unit, disconnect the plug
from the wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.
Using a car battery
Use Sony Car Battery Adaptor (optional). Refer to the operating instructions of the Car
Battery Adaptor for further information.
25
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e
Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time.
“CLOCK SET” will be displayed each time when you set the POWER switch to
CAMERA or MEMORY unless you set the date and time settings.*
If you do not use your camcorder for about three months, the date and time settings
may be cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable
battery will have been discharged (p. 249).
Set the date and time after charging the built-in battery fully.
Set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and then press MENU to
display the menu settings.*
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET in
, then press the
dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired year, then press the dial.
(4) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and
pressing the dial.
(5) Set the minute by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by
the time signal. The clock starts.
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
1,6
MENU
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
USB STREAM
LTR SIZE
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
USB STREAM
LTR SIZE
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
:
:
– – – – – –
2
3
5
2003 JAN
1
12 00 AM
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
2003 JAN
1
2003 JAN
1
12 00 AM
12 00 AM
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
USB STREAM
LTR SIZE
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET JUL
USB STREAM 5 30 00 PM
LTR SIZE
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
4
2003
:
:
2003 JUL
4
5
30 PM
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
26
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e
The year changes as follow s:
2000
2003
2079
To ch e ck t h e p re se t d a t e a n d t im e
Press DATE to display the date indicator.
Press TIME to display the time indicator.
Press DATE (or TIME) and then press TIME (or DATE) to simultaneously display the
date and time indicator.
Press DATE and/ or TIME again. The date and/ or time indicator disappears.
Auto date function
When you use your camcorder for the first time, turn it on and set the date and time to
your local time before you start recording (p. 26). The date is automatically recorded for
10 seconds after you start recording (Auto date function). This function works only
once a day.
If you do not set the date and time
“--- -- ----” “--:--:--” is recorded on the tape
or the “Memory Stick”
.
Note on the time indicator
The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.
• 12:00 AM stands for midnight.
• 12:00 PM stands for noon.
Note on the auto date function
You can change the AUTO DATE setting by selecting ON or OFF in the menu settings.
The auto date function automatically displays the date once a day.
However, the date may automatically appear more than once a day if:
– you set the date and time.
– you eject and insert the tape again.
– you stop recording within 10 seconds.
– you set AUTO DATE to OFF once and set it back to ON in the menu settings.
27
St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e
See page 15 for details about the usable cassettes types.
(1) Prepare the power source (p. 18).
(2) Slide
OPEN/ EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid.
The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.
(3) Push the center of the cassette back and insert the cassette properly with the
cassette window facing up.
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing
on the cassette compartment.
The cassette compartment automatically goes down.
(5) After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it
clicks.
2
3,4
5
To e je ct t h e ca sse t t e
Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step (3).
28
St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e
Notes
• Do not press the cassette compartment down. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
• The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the cassette
compartment other than the mark.
• Your camcorder records pictures in the Digital8 system.
• The recording time when you use your camcorder is half of the indicated time on Hi8
tape. If you select the LP mode in the menu settings, the recording time is 3/ 4 of
the indicated time on Hi8
tape.
• If you use standard 8 mm tape, be sure to play back the tape on your camcorder.
Mosaic noise may appear when you play back standard 8 mm tape on other
camcorders (including another DCR-TRV150/ TRV250/ TRV350/ TRV351).
To prevent accidental erasure
Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.
29
— Re co rd in g – Ba sics —
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Your camcorder automatically focuses.
(1) Remove the lens cap and attach the lens cap to the grip strap.
(2) Install the power source and insert a cassette. See “Step 1” to “Step 3” for more
information (p. 18 to 29).
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.
This sets your camcorder to the standby mode.
(4) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN. The viewfinder automatically
turns off.
(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator
appears on the screen. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your
camcorder lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.
The recording lamp lights up in the viewfinder when you record with the
viewfinder.
1
3
5
SP
REC 0:00:01
50min
4
2
Camera
recording lamp
Microphone
Notes
• The data code (date/ time when recorded) are not displayed during recording.
However, they are recorded automatically onto the tape. To display the data code
(date/ time), press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback.
• Fasten the grip strap firmly.
• Do not touch the built-in microphone during recording.
30
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Note on the LOCK sw itch
When you slide the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set
to MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the left as the default setting.
Note on recording mode
Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode or in the LP
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 219). In the LP mode, you can
1)
record longer than in SP mode.* When you record a tape in the LP mode on your
camcorder, we recommend that you play back the tape on your camcorder.
To enable smooth transition
Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as
you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.
However, check the following:
– Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape.
– When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
2)
If you leave your camcorder in the standby mode for a certain period * w hile the
cassette is inserted
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent
battery and tape wear. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) once, then turn it to CAMERA again. However, your camcorder does not turn
off automatically while the cassette is not inserted.
To set the counter to 0:00:00
Press COUNTER RESET (p. 259).
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes
in the LP mode
• The time code may not be written properly between scenes.
• The transition between scenes may not be smooth.
• The playback picture may be distorted.
1)
* 1.5 times:
Twice:
* three minutes:
2)
five minutes:
31
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Aft e r re co rd in g
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
(2) Close the LCD panel.
(3) Eject the cassette.
(4) Attach the lens cap.
(5) Remove the battery pack.
After using your camcorder
Remove the battery pack from your camcorder to avoid turning on the built-in light
accidentally.
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n
The LCD panel can be opened up to 90 degrees. The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees
to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side (from the initial opening
position).
180°
90°
When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically until it clicks, and swing it into the
camcorder body.
Note
When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder is automatically
turned off.
Notes on the LCD screen
• When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight, the LCD screen may be
difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder.
• When you adjust angles of the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up to
90 degrees.
When recording w ith the LCD panel opened
Recording time becomes a little shorter compared with when recording with the LCD
panel closed.
32
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR/ PLAYER or MEMORY.*
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select LCD BRIGHT in
settings, then press the dial (p. 216).
in the menu
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen with
LCD BRIGHT, then press the dial.
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
2
LCD SET
LCD BR I G HT
LCD B.L.
LCD COLOR
RETURN
[
]
:
MENU
END
MENU
LCD screen backlight
• You can adjust the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings
when using the battery pack (p. 216).
• Even if you adjust the LCD screen backlight, the recorded picture will not be affected.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
33
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.*
Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.
Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings.
“T” side: for telephoto (subject appears closer)
“W” side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away)
W
T
W
W
T
T
To use zoom greater than 20×
Zoom greater than 20× is performed digitally. To activate digital zoom, select the digital
zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF
as a default setting (p. 212).
The right side of the bar shows the digital
zooming zone.
W
T
The digital zooming zone appears when you
select the digital zoom power in the menu
settings.
Notes on digital zoom
• Digital zoom power can be set to 40× or 700×.
• Digital zoom power can be set to 40× or 560×.
• The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the “T”
side.
When you shoot close to a subject
If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the “W” side until the
focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/ 8 inch)
away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/ 2 inch)
away in the wide-angle position.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
34
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r le n s
If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder
come into sharp focus.
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR/ PLAYER or MEMORY.*
Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.
The view finder lens
adjustment lever
Sh o o t in g w it h t h e Mirro r Mo d e
The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you
look at the subject in the viewfinder.
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and rotate the LCD screen
180 degrees.*
The
indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen.
Xz appears in the standby mode, and z appears in the recording mode. Some of other
indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
35
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Pictures in the mirror mode
The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal
when recorded.
During recording in the mirror mode
DATE and TIME on your camcorder do not work.
In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d in t h e re co rd in g m o d e
The indicators are not recorded on the tape.
[a ] [b ] [c] [d ]
[e ]
[a ] [i] [c] [d ]
[j]
SP
SP
REC 0:00:01
REC 0:00:01
40min
40min
[f]
[f]
[g ]
JUL
4
2003
12:05:56 PM
[h ]
[a ] :Remaining battery time indicator
[b ] :Format indicator
[c] : Mirror mode indicator
Recording mode indicator
[d ] :STBY/REC indicator
/
[e ] :Tape photo recording indicator
Time code indicator
/
[f] : Remaining tape indicator
This appears after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA and insert a cassette for
a while.
This appears after you insert a cassette and record or play back for a while.
[g ] :Date indicator
This is displayed for five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or
MEMORY.*
[h ] :Time indicator
This is displayed for five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or
MEMORY.*
[i] : Hi8 format indicator
This appears while playing back or recording Hi8 format tapes.
[j] : Tape counter indicator
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
36
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Remaining battery time indicator
The remaining battery time indicator indicates the approximate recording time. The
indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording.
When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the
correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.
Time code (for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system only)
• When you play back tapes recorded in the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system, the
tape counter appears on the screen.
• The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours:minutes:
seconds) in CAMERA mode and “0:00:00:00” (hours:minutes:seconds:frames) in VCR
mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code. You cannot reset the time code or the
tape counter.
Data code
The data code (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed while
recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto tape. To display the data
code, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback (p. 47).
37
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Sh o o t in g a b a cklit su b je ct – BACK LIGHT
When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a
light background, use the backlight function.
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and press BACK LIGHT.*
The . indicator appears on the screen.
To cancel the backlight function, press BACK LIGHT again.
BACK LIGHT
If you press EXPOSURE w hen shooting backlit subjects
The backlight function will be canceled.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
38
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Sh o o t in g in t h e d a rk – Nig h t Sh o t
– Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t
– Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r
The NightShot function enables you to shoot a subject in a dark place. For example, you
can satisfactorily record the environment of nocturnal animals for observation when
you use this function.
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.*
The
indicator and “NIGHTSHOT” flash on the screen.
To cancel the NightShot function, slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.
COLOR SLOW S
SUPER NS
NIGHTSHOT
OFF ON
Infrared rays
(NightShot Light)
emitter
Usin g t h e Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t
The Super NightShot function makes subjects up to 16 times brighter than those
recorded in the NightShot mode.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, and slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. The
indicator and “NIGHTSHOT” flash on the screen.
(2) Press SUPER NS. The
indicator and “SUPER NIGHTSHOT” flash on the
screen.
To cancel the Super NightShot function, press SUPER NS again. Your
camcorder returns to the NightShot mode.
Usin g t h e Nig h t Sh o t Lig h t
The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable NightShot Light, set
N.S.LIGHT to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.) (p. 213)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
39
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Usin g Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r
The Color Slow Shutter function enables you to record color images in a dark place.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, and slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.
(2) Press COLOR SLOW S.
The
indicator and COLOR SLOW SHUTTER flash on the screen.
To cancel the Color Slow Shutter function, press COLOR SLOW S again.
Notes
• Do not use the NightShot function in bright places (e.g. outdoors in the daytime). This
may cause your camcorder to malfunction.
• When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in normal recording, the picture may be
recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors.
• If focusing is difficult with the autofocus mode when using the NightShot function,
focus manually.
While using the NightShot function, you cannot use the follow ing functions:
– Exposure
– PROGRAM AE
While using the Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter function, you cannot use
the follow ing functions
– Fader
:
– Digital effect
– Exposure
– PROGRAM AE
While using the Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter function
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. The motion of
the picture will be slow.
NightShot Light
NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting distance
using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet).
While recording, be sure not to cover the infrared rays emitter with your fingers, etc.
In total darkness
The Color Slow Shutter function may not work normally.
40
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g
Recording with the self-timer starts in 10 seconds automatically. You can also use the
Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in
dial.
, then press the
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(5) Press START/ STOP.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.
START/STOP
START/STOP
3
CAMERA SET
SELFTIMER
OFF
ON
D
ZOOM
16:9WIDE
STEADYSHOT
N.S.LIGHT
RETURN
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n
Press START/ STOP.
To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r re co rd in g
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode.
You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:
– Self-timer recording is finished.
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY
You can also record still images on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer (p. 135).
41
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Su p e rim p o sin g t h e d a t e a n d t im e o n p ict u re s
You can record the date and/ or time displayed on the screen superimposed on the
picture.
Carry out the following operations in CAMERA mode.
Press DATE to record the date.
Press TIME to record the time.
Press DATE (or TIME), then press TIME (or DATE) to record the date and time.
Press DATE and/ or TIME again. The date and/ or time indicator disappears.
CCD-TRV418
DATE
TIME
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock is not set up yet. Set the date and time to
your local time before using (p. 26).
Note
The date and time indicators recorded manually cannot be deleted.
If you do not record the date and time in the picture
Record the date and time in the black screen as the background for about 10 seconds,
then erase the date and time indicators before starting actual recording.
42
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s – END SEARCH
– EDITSEARCH
– Re c Re vie w
You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture for making the transition
between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record smooth.
END SEARCH
EDITSEARCH
END SEARCH
You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.
In the standby mode, press END SEARCH.
The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your camcorder
returns to the standby mode. You can monitor the sound from the speaker.
EDITSEARCH
You can search for the next recording start point.
In the standby mode, hold down the either side of EDITSEARCH. The recorded portion
is played back.
+ : To go forward
– 7 : To go backward
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/ STOP, re-recording begins
from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.
Re c Re vie w
You can check the last recorded section.
In the standby mode, press the – 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily.
The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few seconds, and
then your camcorder will return to the standby mode. You can monitor the sound from
the speaker.
43
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s – END SEARCH
– EDITSEARCH
– Re c Re vie w
Notes
• The end search, edit search and Rec Review functions do not work with tapes
recorded in the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system.
• If you start recording after using the end search function, occasionally, the transition
between the last scene you recorded and the next scene may not be smooth.
• Once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape, the end search
function does not work.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The end search function may not work correctly.
44
— Pla yb a ck – Ba sics —
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel,
you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder.
You can control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your
camcorder.
(1) Install the power source and insert the recorded tape.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER while pressing the small green button.*
(3) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.
(5) Press N to start playback.
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME. When you
close the LCD panel, sound is muted.
– : To turn the volume down
+ : To turn the volume up
4
5
PLAY
REW
2
6
3
VOLUME
1
To st o p p la yb a ck
Press x.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
45
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
If you leave the pow er on for a long time
Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.
Tapes that can be played back
• Tapes recorded in the Digital8 system
• Tapes recorded in the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system
When monitoring on the LCD screen
You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD
screen facing out.
When you open or close the LCD panel
Make sure that the LCD panel is set vertically.
46
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs – Disp la y fu n ct io n
Press DISPLAY on the Remote Commander.
Press DISPLAY on your camcorder.
The indicators appear on the screen.
To make the indicators disappear, press DISPLAY again.
DATA CODE
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Ab o u t d a t a co d e
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Your camcorder automatically records not only pictures on the tape but also the data
code (date/ time or various settings when recorded).
1 Set the POWER sw itch to VCR, then play back a tape.
2 Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander.
The display changes as follows:
date/ time t various settings t no indicator
Date/time
Various settings
0:00:23:01
0:00:23:01
50min
[a ]
50min
[b ]
[c]
[d ]
[e ]
[f]
AUTO
60 AWB
JUL
12:05:56 PM
4
2003
F1.6
9dB
[g ]
[a ]: Time code/ Tape counter
[b ]: SteadyShot off
[c]: Exposure mode
[d ]: White balance
[e ]: Gain
[f]: Shutter speed
[g ]: Aperture value
47
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
To not display various settings
Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 222).
The display changes as follows when you press DATA CODE on the Remote
Commander:
date/ time y no indicator
Notes on the data code
• The data code does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm
system.
• Various settings of the data code are not recorded when recording images on a
“Memory Stick.”
Data code (Various settings)
The data code is your camcorder’s information at the time of recording. In the recording
mode, the data code will not be displayed.
When you use data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if
– A blank portion of the tape is being played back.
– The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.
:
– The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.
Data code
When you connect your camcorder to a TV, the data code appears on the TV screen.
Remaining battery time indicator during playback
The indicator indicates the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may
not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you
close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct
remaining battery time to be displayed.
48
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s
To operate the video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER.*
To p a u se p la yb a ck (vie w in g a st ill im a g e )
Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press X or N.
To a d va n ce t h e t a p e
Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.
To re w in d t h e t a p e
Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.
To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n
Press
on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction.
To resume normal playback, press N.
To lo ca t e a sce n e m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )
Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the
button.
To m o n it o r h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re s w h ile a d va n cin g o r re w in d in g
t h e t a p e (skip sca n )
Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume
rewinding or advancing, release the button.
To vie w p ict u re s a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)
Press y on the Remote Commander during playback. To resume normal playback,
press N.
To ch a n g e t h e slo w p la yb a ck d ire ct io n
Press
, then press y on the Remote Commander.
To vie w p ict u re s a t d o u b le sp e e d
Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the
reverse direction, press
normal playback, press N.
, then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume
To vie w p ict u re s fra m e -b y-fra m e
Press C on the Remote Commander in the playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame
playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.
To se a rch t h e la st sce n e re co rd e d (END SEARCH)
Press END SEARCH in the stop mode. The last five seconds of the recorded section are
played back and playback stops.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
49
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
In the various playback modes
• The previous recording may appear as a mosaic image when playing back in the
Digital8 system.
• Noise may appear when your camcorder plays back tapes recorded in the Hi8
/
standard 8 mm system.
• Sound is muted.
When the playback pause mode lasts for a certain period *
Your camcorder automatically stops. To resume playback, press N.
Note on the slow playback mode in Digital8 system
The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder, however, this
function does not work for an output image from the DV jack.
If slow playback lasts for about one minute
Your camcorder automatically returns to normal speed playback.
When you play back a tape recorded in the LP mode
Noise may appear on the LCD screen in the following cases:
– slow playback
– playback pause
– picture search
* three minutes:
five minutes:
50
Vie w in g re co rd in g s o n TV
Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder to watch playback pictures on the TV screen. You can operate the video
control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the LCD
screen. When monitoring playback pictures on the TV screen, we recommend that you
power your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC Adaptor (p. 24). Refer to the
operating instructions of your TV.
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/ VCR selector on the TV to VCR.
Yellow
White
IN
S VIDEO
TV
A/ V connecting cable
(supplied)
VIDEO
AUDIO
AUDIO/ A/V OUT
VIDEO
Red
S VIDEO S VIDEO OUT
: Signal flow
Yellow
IN
CCD-TRV418
S VIDEO
TV
A/ V connecting cable
(supplied)
VIDEO
A/V OUT
AUDIO
S VIDEO OUT
: Signal flow
Black
51
Vie w in g re co rd in g s o n TV
If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o a VCR
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/ V connecting
cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.
If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,
the right channel audio is output.
To co n n e ct t o a TV w it h o u t Vid e o /Au d io in p u t ja cks
Use an NTSC system RFU adaptor (optional).
Refer to the operating instructions of your TV and the RFU adaptor.
If yo u r TV is a st e re o t yp e
Connect the audio plug of the A/ V connecting cable supplied to the left (white) input
jack of your TV.
Note
Noise appears on the TV screen in the various playback modes.
If your TV has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With
this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your
camcorder and the TV.
To display the screen indicators on TV
Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings (p. 222).
Then, press DISPLAY on your camcorder. To turn the screen indicators off, press
DISPLAY on your camcorder again.
52
— Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” w h ile re co rd in g o n a t a p e
You can record still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or standby
mode.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder (p. 127).
In the standby mode or during tape recording, press PHOTO deeper.
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
The still image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the “Memory
Stick.”
50min
REC
0:00:01
In the standby mode
You can check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The CAPTURE
indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image, release
PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.
Approximate number of images that can be recorded
50min
FINE
26
CAPTURE
101
In the recording mode
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly.
53
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” w h ile re co rd in g o n a
t a p e
“Memory Stick”
For more information, see page 240.
Notes
• Do not shake or strike your camcorder when you record still images. The image may
fluctuate.
• You cannot record still images on a “Memory Stick” in the following functions (The
indicator flashes):
– Wide mode
– BOUNCE
– MEMORY MIX
– END SEARCH
The follow ing settings cannot be changed
The settings you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY are used:
– Image quality (p. 128)
– Recording folder (p. 162)
To record still images using the Remote Commander
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records the
image on the screen.
During and after recording still images on a “Memory Stick”
Your camcorder continues recording on tape.
Title
The title cannot be recorded.
While recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in CAMERA mode
The image is recorded in the FIELD mode automatically even if you select FRAME in
the menu settings.
54
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” w h ile re co rd in g o n a
t a p e
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g
You can record still images on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. You can also use
the Remote Commander for this operation.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder (p. 127).
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in
, then press the
dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(5) Press PHOTO deeper.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.
5
PHOTO
3
CAMERA SET
OFF
ON
SELFTIMER
D
ZOOM
16:9WIDE
STEADYSHOT
N.S.LIGHT
RETURN
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode.
You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:
– self-timer recording is finished.
– the POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
Taking photos w ith the self-timer
The self-timer can only be operated when in the standby mode.
55
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e
– Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g
You can record a still image like a photograph.
You can record about 510 images in the SP mode and about 765 images in the LP mode
on a tape which can record for 60 minutes in the SP mode.
In the standby mode or during tape recording, press PHOTO deeper.
The still image on the screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound during
those seven seconds is also recorded.
The still image is displayed on the screen until recording is completed.
•••••••
DCR-TRV250
In the standby mode
You can check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The CAPTURE
indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image, release
PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.
CAPTURE
56
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e – Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g
Notes
• During Tape Photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.
• You cannot use PHOTO while using BOUNCE in the Fader function.
• When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. The image may fluctuate.
• The tape photo recording does not work while using Fader (The
flashes).
indicator
If you record a moving subject w ith the tape photo recording function
The image may fluctuate when you play back the still image on other equipment.
This is not a malfunction.
To use the tape photo recording function using the Remote Commander
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder records an image on the
screen immediately.
57
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e
If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1/ ID-2 system, the screen size is
automatically selected.
You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on the 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).
[b ]
16:9WIDE
16:9WIDE
[a]
[c]
[d ]
[a ]: Recording in the 16:9WIDE mode
[b ]: Playback on a normal TV
[c]: Playback on a wide TV in the normal screen mode
[d ]: Full screen mode on a wide TV
In the standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in
in the menu settings (p. 212).
CAMERA SET
SELFT I MER
D
ZOOM
16:9W I DE
OFF
STEADYSHOT ON
N.S.LIGHT
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
58
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e
You can record a cinema-like picture (CINEMA) or a 16:9 wide picture (16:9FULL) to
watch on the 16:9 wide-screen TV. Refer to the operating instructions of your TV.
[b]
CINEMA
CINEMA
[a]
[d]
[c]
[b]
[c]
16:9FULL
16:9FULL
[e]
[f]
[a ]: Recording in the CINEMA mode
[b]: Playback on a normal TV
[c]: Playback on a wide TV in the normal screen mode
[d]: Zoom mode on a wide TV
[e ]: Recording in the 16:9FULL mode
[f]: Full mode on a wide TV
In the standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to CINEMA or 16:9FULL in
settings (p. 212).
in the menu
CAMERA SET
ZOOM
16:9W I DE
STEADYSHOT CINEMA
D
OFF
16:9FULL
N.S.LIGHT
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
CCD-TRV418
MENU
59
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e
To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e
In the standby mode, set the wide mode to OFF in the menu settings.
In the w ide mode
You cannot operate the following functions:
– OLD MOVIE
(p. 65)
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in tape recording or tape recording
standby
– BOUNCE (p. 61)
Connection for a TV
Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full
size when:
– You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2)
system.
– You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on the TV.
ID-1 system
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio (screen horizontal/ vertical ratio) information (16:9,
4:3, or letter box) with video signals.
ID-2 system
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between
video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment by an A/ V
connecting cable.
In the w ide mode
The SteadyShot does not work. If you set the wide mode described below in the menu
settings when the SteadyShot is working, the
does not function:
indicator flashes and the SteadyShot
– 16:9WIDE to ON
– 16:9WIDE to 16:9FULL
Date or time indicator
When you record in the 16:9FULL mode, the date or time indicator will be widened on
wide-screen TVs.
60
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n
You can fade in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.
FADER
M.FADER
(mosaic)
STRIPE
1) 2)
BOUNCE * *
2)
OVERLAP *
2)
WIPE *
2)
DOT *
(random dot)
MONOTONE
When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.
When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.
1)
* You can use BOUNCE when D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu setting.
2)
* Fade in only
61
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n
(1) To fade in [a ]
In the standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.
To fade out [b ]
In the recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.
The indicator changes as follows:
FADER t M.FADER t STRIPE t BOUNCE t MONOTONE
no indicator
DOT
WIPE
OVERLAP
The last selected fader mode is indicated first of all.
(2) Press START/ STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing.
After fade in/ out ends, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal
mode.
1
FADER
FADER
To ca n ce l t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n
Before pressing START/ STOP, press FADER repeatedly until the indicator disappears.
Notes
• The OVERLAP, WIPE and DOT functions do not work with tapes recorded in the
Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system.
• You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function. Also, you
cannot use the fader function while using the following functions:
– Digital effect
– Color Slow Shutter
– Super NightShot
– Tape Photo recording
– Interval recording
– Frame recording
62
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n
When you set the POWER sw itch to MEMORY
You cannot use the fader function.
When you select OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT
Your camcorder automatically stores the picture recorded on the tape. While the picture
is being stored, the indicator flashes fast, and the picture from the tape appears on the
screen. At this stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape
condition.
The date, time indicator
and title do not fade in or fade out
Erase them before operating the fader function if they are not needed.
While using the bounce mode, you cannot use the follow ing functions:
– Recording on a “Memory Stick”
– Exposure
– Focus
– Zoom
– Picture effect
– PROGRAM AE
– BACK LIGHT
Note on the bounce mode
The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following functions:
– When D ZOOM is set to 40× or 700×.
– When D ZOOM is set to 40× or 560×.
– Wide mode
– Picture effect
– PROGRAM AE
63
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Pict u re e ffe ct
You can digitally process pictures to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.
NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.
SEPIA :
The picture appears in sepia.
B&W :
The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).
SOLARIZE [b ] : The picture appears as an illustration with strong contrast.
SLIM [c] : The picture expands vertically.
STRETCH [d ] : The picture expands horizontally.
PASTEL [e ] :
The picture appears as a pale pastel drawing.
MOSAIC [f] : The picture appears mosaic.
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
[d ]
[e ]
[f]
(1) In CAMERA mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select P EFFECT in
, then press the dial
(p. 211).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode, then
press the dial.
MANUA L S E T
PROGRAM AE
O F F
NE G
S E P
2
.
A R T
A
P
D
E F F E C T
E F F E C T
I
F L A S H M O D E B &
W
AUTO SHTR
RETURN
S OL A R I
S L
Z
E
I
M
S T RE T C H
P A S T E
MOS A
L
C
I
[
]
:
MENU
END
MENU
To ca n ce l Pict u re e ffe ct
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
While using Picture effect
You cannot select OLD MOVIE with Digital effect.
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)
Picture effect is automatically canceled.
64
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct
You can add special effects to recorded images using the various digital functions. The
sound is recorded normally.
STILL
You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
You can record still images successively at regular intervals.
LUMI. (LUMINANCE KEY)
You can swap the brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.
TRAIL
You can record a picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.
SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)
You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter mode is good for recording
dark pictures more brightly.
OLD MOVIE
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically
changes the screen format to wide and the color to sepia and set the appropriate shutter
speed.
Still image
Moving picture
STILL
LUMI.
Still image
Moving picture
65
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct
(1) In CAMERA mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select D EFFECT in
(p. 211).
, then press the dial
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode.
(4) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. The bars appear on the screen. In the STILL
and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored in memory.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect, then press the dial.
Effect
Items to be adjusted
STILL
The degree of still image you want to superimpose on the moving
picture.
FLASH
LUMI.
The interval of flash motion.
The brightness of the area in the still image which is to be swapped
with a moving picture.
TRAIL
The vanishing time of the incidental picture.
SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the
shutter speed becomes.
OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary.
The more bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect. The bars appear
in the following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.
MENU
MANUAL SET
EFFECT
MANUAL SET
EFFECT
D
D
OFF
2
4
STILL
FLASH
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LUMI.
LUMI.
I I I I I I I I •
TRAIL
SLOW SHTR
OLD MOVIE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l Dig it a l e ffe ct
Set D EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
66
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct
Notes
• The following functions do not work during digital effects:
– Fader
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
• The PROGRAM AE function does not work in the slow shutter mode.
• The following functions do not work in the OLD MOVIE mode:
– Wide mode
– Picture effect
– PROGRAM AE
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)
Digital effect is automatically canceled.
When recording in the slow shutter mode
Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.
Shutter speed
Shutter speed number
SLOW SHTR 1
SLOW SHTR 2
SLOW SHTR 3
SLOW SHTR 4
Shutter speed
1/ 30
1/ 15
1/ 8
1/ 4
67
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n
You can select the PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) mode to suit your specific shooting
requirements.
(SPOTLIGHT)
This mode prevents people’s faces, for example, from appearing excessively white
when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater.
(PORTRAIT)
This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as
people or flowers.
(SPORTS)
This mode minimizes camera shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.
(BEACH & SKI)
This mode prevents people’s faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.
(SUNSETMOON)
This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general
night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.
(LANDSCAPE)
This mode is for when you record distant subjects such as mountains and prevents your
camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you record a subject
behind glass or a screen.
68
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n
(1) In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.*
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PROGRAM AE in
, then press the
dial (p. 211).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.
2
MANUAL SET
PROGRAM AE AUTO
P
D
EFFECT
EFFECT
SPOTLIGHT
PORTRAIT
FLASH MODE SPORTS
AUTO SHTR BEACH&SKI
RETURN
SUNSETMOON
LANDSCAPE
[
]
MENU : END
MENU
To ca n ce l t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n
Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO in the menu settings.
Notes
• In the SPOTLIGHT, SPORTS and BEACH & SKI modes, you cannot take close-ups.
This is because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far
distance.
• In the SUNSETMOON and LANDSCAPE modes, your camcorder is set to focus only
on distant subjects.
• The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE function:
– Color Slow Shutter
– SLOW SHUTTER
– OLD MOVIE
– BOUNCE
• PROGRAM AE function does not work in the following cases (The indicator flashes):
– When using MEMORY MIX on a “Memory Stick.”
– When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.
If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium
lamp or mercury lamp
Flickering or changes in color may occur in the following modes. If this happens, turn
the PROGRAM AE function off:
– PORTRAIT
– SPORTS
Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected
You can adjust the exposure.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
69
Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re m a n u a lly
You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Normally, exposure is automatically
adjusted.
Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:
– When the subject is backlit.
– When shooting bright subjects against dark backgrounds.
– When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully.
(1) In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press EXPOSURE.* The exposure indicator
appears on the screen.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness.
1
EXPOSURE
2
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re m o d e
Press EXPOSURE.
Note
When you adjust the exposure manually, the following functions do not work:
– Color Slow Shutter
– BACK LIGHT
Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure mode:
– If you change the PROGRAM AE mode.
– If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
70
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly
You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases:
• The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting:
– Subjects through glass covered with water droplets.
– Horizontal stripes.
– Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls or the sky.
• When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in
the background.
• Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod.
Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.
(1) In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press FOCUS.* The 9 indicator appears on
the screen.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to sharpen focus.
FOCUS
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s m o d e
Press FOCUS.
To focus precisely
It is easier to focus on subjects if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the “W” (wide-angle)
after focusing at the “T” (telephoto) position.
When you shoot close to the subject
Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position.
The 9 indicator changes to the follow ing indicators:
when recording a distant subject.
when the subject is too close to focus on.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
71
In t e rva l re co rd in g
Example
You can make a time-lapse recording by
setting your camcorder to automatically
record and standby sequentially. You can
achieve an excellent recording for flowering,
gradual appearances, etc., with this function.
1 S
1 S
[a]
[b]
[c]
9 MIN 59 S
10 MIN
9 MIN 59 S
10 MIN
[a]: Recording time (REC TIME)
[b]: Waiting time
[c]: Interval time (INTERVAL)
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INT. REC in
(p. 219).
, then press the dial
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.
(4) Set INTERVAL and REC TIME.
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then
press the dial.
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial.
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then
press the dial.
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
RETURN, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The INTERVAL TAPE
indicator flashes.
(7) Press START/ STOP to start interval recording. The INTERVAL TAPE
indicator lights up.
72
In t e rva l re co rd in g
7
2,3
TAPE SET
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUTO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
RETURN
REC MODE
AUTO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
RETURN
OFF
ON
OFF
SET
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
TAPE SET
4
REC MODE
AUTO MODE
REMAIN
5
TAPE SET
I NT. REC
I NTERVAL 30SEC
REC TIME
RETURN
TAPE SET
I NT. REC
FRAME REC
I NT. REC
RETURN
ON
OFF
SET
I NTERVAL 30SEC
REC TIME
RETURN
1MIN
5MIN
10M IN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
TAPE SET
I NT. REC
TAPE SET
I NT. REC
6
I NTERVAL
I NTERVAL
REC TIME 0. 5SEC
RETURN
REC TIME 0. 5SEC
RETURN
1SEC
1. 5SEC
2SEC
I NTERVAL
TAPE
MENU
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
To ca n ce l in t e rva l re co rd in g
Perform either of the following:
– Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.
– Set the POWER switch to the position other than CAMERA.
To p e rfo rm n o rm a l re co rd in g d u rin g in t e rva l re co rd in g
You can perform normal recording only once during interval.
Press START/ STOP. The INTERVAL TAPE indicator flashes, and normal recording
starts. To stop normal recording, press START/ STOP again and the screen in step (6)
appears.
On recording time
There may be a discrepancy in the recording time of up to +/ – six frames from the
selected time.
73
Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g
– Fra m e re co rd in g
You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.
To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a frame recording.
We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote
Commander after step (5).
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select FRAME REC in
, then press the
dial (p. 219).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
The FRAME REC indicator appears.
(5) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a
recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.
(6) Move the subject, and repeat step (5).
5
4
3
REC MODE
TAPE SET
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUTO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC ON
I NT. REC
RETURN
AUTO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC
FRAME REC OFF
I NT. REC
RETURN
ON
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l t h e fra m e re co rd in g
Perform either of the following:
– Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.
– Set the POWER switch to the position other than CAMERA.
Note
The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if you use this function continuously.
When using the frame recording function
The last recorded cut is longer than other cuts.
74
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le
You can select one of the eight preset titles and the two custom titles (p. 77). You can
also select the language, color, size and position of titles.
VACATION
(1) In the standby mode, press TITLE to display the title menu. The title menu
display appears on the screen.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.
The titles are displayed in the language you selected.
(4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary.
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select COLOR, SIZE, or POSITION, then
press the dial. The selected item appears on the screen.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the
dial.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.
(6) Press START/ STOP to start recording.
(7) When you want to stop recording the title, press TITLE.
1
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
TITLE
2
3
4
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END
TITLE : END
VACATION
THE END
[
]
TITLE : END
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
TITLE
VACATION
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END
TITLE : END
SIZE
SMALL
TITLE
SIZE
LARGE
VACATION
VACATION
[
]
TITLE : END
75
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le
To su p e rim p o se t h e t it le w h ile yo u a re re co rd in g
Press TITLE while you are recording, and carry out steps (2) to (5). When you press the
SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial at step (5), the title is recorded.
To se le ct t h e la n g u a g e o f a p re se t t it le
If you want to change the language, select
before step (2). Then select the desired
language and return to step (2).
Note
The date and time, or either of them, may not be displayed depending on the size or
position of the title.
If you display the menu w hile superimposing a title
The title is not recorded while the menu is displayed.
To use a custom title
If you want to use a custom title, select
in step (2).
Title setting
• The title color changes as follows:
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE
• The title size changes as follows:
SMALL y LARGE
You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size. If you input more than 12
characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE.
• The title position changes as follows:
1 y 2 y 3 y 4 y 5 y 6 y 7 y 8 y 9
The larger the position number, the lower the title is positioned.
When you select the title size “LARGE,” you cannot choose position 9.
In CINEMA mode, you cannot choose position 9 for “SMALL” size titles, and position
8 or 9 for “LARGE” size titles.
When you are selecting and setting the title
You cannot record the title displayed on the screen.
When you superimpose a title w hile you are recording
The beep does not sound.
While you are playing back
You can superimpose a title. However, the title is not recorded on the tape.
You can record a title when you dub a tape by connecting your camcorder to a VCR
with the A/ V connecting cable.
If you use the i.LINK cable instead of the A/ V connecting cable, you cannot record the
title.
76
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s
You can make up to two titles and store them in your camcorder. Each title can have up
to 20 characters.
(1) In CAMERA or VCR/ PLAYER mode, press TITLE.*
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,
then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,
then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the
dial.
(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) until you have selected all characters and completed
the title.
(7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET,
then press the dial. The title is stored in memory.
(8) Press TITLE to make the title menu disappear.
1
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
TITLE
2
3
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
[
] :
TITLE END
[
] :
TITLE END
VACATION
THE END
TITLE SET
TITLE SET
P1
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
[
] :
TITLE END
ABCDE 12345 $F¥
DM
£
¿
FGHIJ 67890
i ø ” :
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ
[
C
]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]
ç
Z& ?! ÃÕÑ
ß
’ . , / – ÄÏÖÜÅ
[
]
[
] :
TITLE END
TITLE : END
TITLE SET
P1
TITLE SET
P1
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
4
6
ABCDE 12345 $F¥
DM
£
ABCDE 12345 $F¥
DM
£
¿
¿
FGHIJ 67890
i ø ” :
FGHIJ 67890
i ø ” :
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ
[
C
]
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ
[
C
]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]
ç
ç
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ
’ .
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ
’ .
,
/
–
ÄÏÖÜÅ
,
/
–
ÄÏÖÜÅ
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END
TITLE : END
TITLE SET
P1
TITLE SET
P1
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
ABCDE 12345 $F¥
DM
£
ABCDE 12345 $F¥
DM
£
¿
¿
FGHIJ 67890
i ø ” :
FGHIJ 67890
i ø ” :
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ
[
C
]
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ
[
C
]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]
ç
ç
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ
’ .
’ .
,
/
–
ÄÏÖÜÅ
,
/
–
ÄÏÖÜÅ
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END
TITLE : END
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
77
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s
To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d
In step (3), select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want
to change, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The
last character is erased. Enter the new title as desired.
1)
If it takes a certain period * or longer to enter characters in the standby mode
w hile a cassette is in your camcorder
The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in
memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once, and turn it to CAMERA again,
then start from step (1).
We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER or removing the cassette
so that your camcorder is not automatically turned off while you are entering title
2)
characters.*
To erase a character
Select [C]. The last character is erased.
To enter a space
Select [Z& ?!], then select the blank part between & and ?.
If you select [
]
The menu for selecting alphabet and Russian characters appears. Select [
to the previous screen.
] to return
1)
* three minutes:
five minutes:
2)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
78
Usin g t h e b u ilt -in lig h t
You can use the built-in light to suit your shooting situation. The recommended
distance between the subject and camcorder is about 1.5 m (5 feet).
In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press LIGHT repeatedly until the
appears on the screen.*
indicator
The indicator changes as follows:
t
t
t no indicator
The built-in light turns on.
If you turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), the built-in light turns off
simultaneously. You cannot turn the built-in light on by turning the POWER switch to
CAMERA or MEMORY again.* To turn on the built-in light again, press LIGHT again in
CAMERA or MEMORY mode.*
LIGHT
Built-in light
To t u rn o ff t h e b u ilt -in lig h t
Press LIGHT repeatedly until no indicator appears on the screen.
To t u rn o n t h e b u ilt -in lig h t a u t o m a t ica lly
Press LIGHT repeatedly until the
indicator appears on the screen.
The built-in light automatically turns on and off according to the ambient brightness.
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the lighting section, because the plastic w indow and
surrounding surfaces are hot w hile the light is on. It remains hot for a w hile after
the light is turned off.
DANGER
Not to be handled by children.
Emits intense heat and light.
Use w ith caution to reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons.
Do not directly aim the light at persons or materials from less than 1.22 m (4 feet)
aw ay during use and until the light becomes cool.
Turn the built-in light off w hen not in use.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
79
Usin g t h e b u ilt -in lig h t
Notes
• The built-in light turns off automatically in the following cases:
– When you leave it on for more than five minutes with the POWER switch set to
MEMORY.
– When it stays on in the AUTO mode (
) for more than five minutes.
– When you leave it on for more than five minutes with no cassette inserted or after
the tape has run out.
To turn the built-in light on again, press LIGHT again.
• The battery pack discharges quickly while the built-in light is turned on. Turn it off
when not in use.
• When you do not use your camcorder, turn the built-in light off and remove the
battery pack to avoid turning on the built-in light accidentally.
• When flickering occurs while shooting in the AUTO mode (
until the indicator appears.
• The built-in light may turn on/ off when you use the PROGRAM AE or backlight
function while shooting in the AUTO mode ( ).
), press LIGHT
• The built-in light may turn off when inserting or ejecting a cassette.
• The built-in light is turned off in the following cases:
– While the end search function is working
– Interval time of Interval recording
• When you use the conversion lens (optional), light from the built-in light is blocked
and may not illuminate the subject properly.
80
Usin g t h e b u ilt -in lig h t
Re p la cin g t h e b u lb
Use the Sony XB-3D halogen lamp (optional). The supplied halogen lamp is not
commercially available. Purchase the Sony XB-3D halogen lamp.
Remove the power source before replacing the bulb.
(1) Remove the built-in light unit while pushing the hole under the built-in light
unit using a wire.
(2) Turn the bulb housing counterclockwise and detach from the built-in light
unit.
(3) Replace the bulb using a dry cloth.
(4) Attach the bulb housing by turning it clockwise, then replace the built-in light
unit.
1
4
2
3
NOTE
Be sure to align the tab w ith
the groove w hen inserting.
CAUTION
• When replacing the bulb, use only the Sony XB-3D halogen lamp (optional) to reduce
the risk of fire.
• To prevent possible burn hazard, disconnect the power source before replacing and
do not touch the bulb until the bulb becomes cool enough to handle (for about 30
minutes or more).
Note
To prevent the bulb from being smudged with finger prints, handle it with a dry cloth,
etc. If the bulb is smudged, wipe it thoroughly.
81
In se rt in g a sce n e
You can insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape by setting the start and end
points. The previously recorded frames between these start and end points will be
erased.
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
[a ]
[b ]
(1) In the standby mode, keep pressing EDITSEARCH, and release the button at
the insert end point [b ].
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander.
The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes and the counter resets to zero.
(3) Keep pressing the – 7 side of EDITSEARCH and release the button at the
insert start point [a ].
(4) Press START/ STOP to start recording.
The scene is inserted. Recording stops automatically near the counter zero
point. Your camcorder returns to the standby mode.
The zero set memory function is canceled.
ZERO SET
MEMORY
EDITSEARCH
Notes
• The zero set memory function does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
/
standard 8 mm system.
• The picture and the sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted section when it
is played back.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The zero set memory function may not work correctly.
82
— Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h p ict u re e ffe ct s
During playback, you can process a scene using the following picture effects:
NEG.ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.
(1) In the playback or playback pause mode, press MENU to display the menu
settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select P EFFECT in
, then press the dial
(p. 211).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode, then
press the dial.
For details of each picture effect, see page 64.
2
MANUAL SET
P
D
EFFECT
EFFECT
OFF
NEG. ART
SEPIA
B&W
SOLARIZE
RETURN
1
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
To ca n ce l Pict u re e ffe ct
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
83
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h p ict u re e ffe ct s
Notes
• You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder while you are processing the
image using Picture effect. However, you can record images as follows:
– on a “Memory Stick” as a still image
– on a VCR using your camcorder as a player
• Picture effect does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
system.
/ standard 8 mm
• You cannot process externally input scenes using Picture effect.
Pictures processed by Picture effect
Pictures processed by Picture effect are not output through the DV jack.
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back
Picture effect is automatically canceled.
84
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct s
During playback, you can process a scene using the following digital effects:
STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.
(1) In the playback mode or playback pause mode, press MENU to display the
menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select D EFFECT in
, then press the dial
(p. 211).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode, then
press the dial. The bars appear on the screen.
In the STILL or LUMI. mode, the picture shown when you press the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial is captured and stored in memory as a still image at the time.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect, then press the dial.
For details of each digital effect, see page 65.
MENU
MANUAL SET
EFFECT
OFF
ST ILL
FLASH
LUMI.
TRAIL
MANUAL SET
EFFECT
D
D
2
4
1
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LUMI.
I I I I I I I I •
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l Dig it a l e ffe ct
Set D EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
85
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct s
Notes
• You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder while you are processing the
image using Digital effect. However, you can record images as follows:
– on a “Memory Stick” as a still image
– on a VCR using your camcorder as a player
• Digital effect does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
system.
/ standard 8 mm
• You cannot process externally input scenes using Digital effect.
Pictures processed by Digital effect
Pictures processed by Digital effect are not output through the DV jack.
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back
Digital effect is automatically canceled.
86
En la rg in g re co rd e d im a g e s
– Ta p e PB ZOOM
You can enlarge an image recorded on tapes.
Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded
on a “Memory Stick” (p. 172).
(1) In the playback or playback pause mode, press PB ZOOM. The center of the
image is enlarged to about twice its size, and
appear on the screen.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the
dial.
: To view the upper part of the image
: To view the lower part of the image
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the
dial.
: To view the left part of the image (Turn the dial downward.)
: To view the right part of the image (Turn the dial upward.)
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.
You can enlarge the image from 1.1 times up to five times its size.
W : To decrease the zoom ratio
T : To increase the zoom ratio
4
PB ZOOM
× 2.0
2
[
]
EXEC : T t
PB ZOOM
× 2.0
3
1
[
]
EXEC : r R
PB ZOOM
To ca n ce l Ta p e PB ZOOM
Press PB ZOOM.
87
En la rg in g re co rd e d im a g e s – Ta p e PB ZOOM
Notes
• You cannot record images on a tape or on a “Memory Stick” on your camcorder while
you are processing the image using Tape PB ZOOM. However, you can record images
on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.
• Tape PB ZOOM does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
system.
/ standard 8 mm
• You cannot process externally input scenes using Tape PB ZOOM.
Images in Tape PB ZOOM
These images are not output through the DV jack.
Tape PB ZOOM is automatically canceled w hen:
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG).
– You stop playing back.
– You press MENU.
– You press TITLE.
88
Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e
– ZERO SET MEMORY
Your camcorder automatically searches for the scene having a tape counter value of
“0:00:00. ”
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Use this function, for example, to view a desired scene later on during playback.
(1) In the playback mode, press DISPLAY when the tape counter is not displayed
on the screen.
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape
counter shows “0:00:00,” then starts counting.
The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes on the screen.
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the counter’s zero point. The tape stops
automatically when the counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET
MEMORY indicator disappears, and the time code appears.
(5) Press N. Playback starts from the counter’s zero point.
DISPLAY
ZERO SET MEMORY
m
x
N
Notes
• The zero set memory does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
/
standard 8 mm system.
• When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory
is canceled.
• There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the time code and the tape
counter.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The zero set memory may not work correctly.
The zero set memory also in the standby mode
When you insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at
the point you want to end the insertion. Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and
start recording. Recording stops automatically at the tape counter zero point. Your
camcorder returns to the standby mode.
89
Se a rch in g fo r a re co rd in g b y d a t e
– DATE SEARCH
Your camcorder can automatically search for the point where the recording date
changes and starts playback from that point.
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each
recording date.
JUL 4 2003
JUL 5 2003
DEC 31 2003
[a ]
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
[b ]
[c]
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE
SEARCH indicator appears on the screen. The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH y (no indicator)
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)
(3) When the current position is [b ], press . to search toward [a ] or press >
to search toward [c]. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the point
where the date changes.
Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or
next date.
DATE
SEARCH
00
2
3
SEARCH
MODE
DATE
01
SEARCH
To st o p se a rch in g
Press x.
90
Se a rch in g fo r a re co rd in g b y d a t e – DATE SEARCH
Notes
• The date search function does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
/
standard 8 mm system.
• If one day’s recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately
find the point where the recording date changes.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The date search function may not work correctly.
91
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o
– PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN
You can search for the still image recorded on a tape (photo search).
You can also search for still images one after another and display each image for five
seconds automatically (photo scan).
Use the Remote Commander for these operations.
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears on the screen. The indicator changes as
follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)
(3) Press . or > to select the photo for playback. Each time you press . or
> your camcorder searches for the previous or next photo. Your camcorder
automatically starts playback of the photo.
PHOTO
SEARCH
00
2
3
SEARCH
MODE
PHOTO
01
SEARCH
DCR-TRV250
To st o p se a rch in g
Press x.
92
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o – PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN
Sca n n in g p h o t o
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the
PHOTO SCAN indicator appears on the screen.
The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)
(3) Press . or >.
Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.
PHOTO
00
SCAN
2
3
SEARCH
MODE
DCR-TRV250
To st o p sca n n in g
Press x.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The photo search and photo scan function may not work correctly.
93
— Ed it in g —
Du b b in g a t a p e
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as
a player.
Before operation
• Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
• Press the following buttons to make the indicators disappear so that they will not be
superimposed on the edited tape:
– DATA CODE on the Remote Commander
– SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander
– DISPLAY
(1) Insert a tape for recording into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your
camcorder.
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE.
Connect the A/ V connecting cable to the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack. Refer to the
operating instructions of your VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER.*
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR.
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
Yellow
White
IN
S VIDEO
A/ V connecting cable
(supplied)
VIDEO
AUDIO
VCR
AUDIO/ A/V OUT
VIDEO
Red
S VIDEO S VIDEO OUT
: Signal flow
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
94
Du b b in g a t a p e
Yellow
IN
CCD-TRV418
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
A/V OUT
S VIDEO OUT
VCR
A/ V connecting cable
(supplied)
Black
: Signal flow
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
To p re ve n t d e t e rio ra t io n o f p ict u re s w h e n d u b b in g
Set EDIT to ON in the menu settings before dubbing. (The default setting is OFF.)
(p. 214)
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:
8 mm , Hi8
, Digital8 , VHS
, S-VHS
, VHSC
, S-VHSC
,
Betamax , ED Betamax
, mini DV , DV
, or MICRO MV
.
If your VCR is a monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR. When the white plug is
connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected, the
right channel audio is output.
If your VCR is a stereo type
Connect the audio plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the left (white) input jack of
your VCR.
If your VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
VCR.
95
Du b b in g a t a p e
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to DV on your camcorder and to DV IN on
the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are
transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the screen
indicators.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert
the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Set the input selector on the VCR to DV IN if it is available. Refer to the
operating instructions of your VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR.
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
VCR
DV
DV
DV IN
i.LINK cable
(optional)
is marked on
this side.
: Signal flow
96
Du b b in g a t a p e
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
Note on tapes that are recorded in the Hi8
/standard 8 mm system
The picture may fluctuate. This is not a malfunction. Digital signals are output as image
signals from the DV jack during playback.
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable
See page 244 for more information about i.LINK.
Pictures processed by the follow ing functions cannot be output through the DV
jack:
– Digital effect
– Tape PB ZOOM
– Picture effect
If you record paused playback picture w ith the DV jack
The recorded picture becomes rough. Also, when you play back the picture using other
video equipment, the picture may jitter.
When you connect using an i.LINK cable
You cannot dub the titles and display indicators.
97
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
VCR operation for dubbing can be controlled easily by using your camcorder
when the VCR is connected.
You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles stored in your camcorder
as instructed in “Making your own titles” (p. 77). Select the desired color, size, and
background color of titles.
Usin g t h e Ea sy Du b b in g
Step 1 Connecting the VCR
Step 2 Setting the VCR to operate with your camcorder (p. 99 to 102)
Step 3 Selecting the title (p. 103)
Step 4 Selecting the dubbing mode (p. 104)
Step 5 Performing Easy Dubbing (p. 105)
If you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Step 2 (p. 99 to 102).
If you do not need to put in a title, you can skip Step 3 (p. 103).
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR
Connect the devices as illustrated in page 95.
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:
8 mm , Hi8
, Digital8 , VHS
, S-VHS
, VHSC
, S-VHSC
,
Betamax , ED Betamax
, mini DV , DV
, or MICRO MV
.
If your VCR has an S video jack
Picture can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
VCR.
98
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h yo u r ca m co rd e r
Signals to control the VCR are sent from your camcorder’s infrared rays emitter to the
VCR’s remote sensor.
When you connect using the A/ V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps
(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.
(1) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR
1 Set the POWER switch to PLAYER on your camcorder.
2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE.
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VTR/
VCR.
3 Press EASY DUB to display the menu.
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SETUP, then press the dial.
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSE MODE, then press the
dial.
6 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording
pause on the VCR, then press the dial.
1
4
5
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S E T U P
0:00:00
I
R
SETUP
PAUSE MODE
TEST
R E T U R N
3
I
R
NORMAL
[
]
:
E A S Y D UB
END
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S E T U P
0:00:00
I
R
SETUP
PAUSE MODE PAUSE
I
R
TEST
REC
PB
R E T U R N
NORMAL
[
]
:
E A S Y D UB
END
CCD-TRV418
3
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S T A R T
L E S E L
M O D E S E L
SETUP
0:00:00
T
I
T
EASY DUB
NORMAL
[
]
:
E A S Y D UB
END
99
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
Buttons for canceling recording pause on the VCR
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:
– Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.
– Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.
– Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.
(2) Se t t in g t h e IR SETUP co d e
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the IR SETUP code of your VCR,
then press the dial.
Check the code in “About the IR SETUP code” (p. 101).
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S E T U P
0:00:00
1
I
R
SETUP
PAUSE MODE
TEST
R E T U R N
3
I
R
NORMAL
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
CCD-TRV418
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S E T U P
0:00:00
3
I
R
SETUP
PAUSE MODE
TEST
R E T U R N
I
R
NORMAL
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
100
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
About the IR SETUP code
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the
correct code depending on your VCR. The default setting is Code number 3.
Brand
IR SETUP code
Brand
IR SETUP code
* TV/ VCR component
Note on IR SETUP code
Easy Dubbing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.
101
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r
Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote
sensor of the VCR.
Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the
devices.
Infrared rays emitter
VCR
Remote sensor
A/ V connecting
cable (supplied)
CCD-TRV418
(4) Co n firm in g t h e VCR o p e ra t io n
1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording pause.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.
When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.
2
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S E T U P
0:00:00
I
R
SETUP
PAUSE MODE
TEST
R E T U R N
I
R
READY
NORMAL
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S E T U P
0:00:00
ENGAGE
REC PAUSE
I
R
SETUP
PAUSE MODE
TEST
R E T U R N
CCD-TRV418
I
R
RETURN
EXECUTE
NORMAL
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
Wh e n t h e VCR d o e s n o t o p e ra t e co rre ct ly
• After checking the code in “About the IR SETUP code,” set IR SETUP or
PAUSE MODE again.
• Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.
• Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
102
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
St e p 3: Se le ct in g t h e t it le
You can select title, color, size, and background color.
CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are custom titles stored in your camcorder as instructed in
“Making your own titles” (p. 77).
HELLO!
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE SEL, then press the dial.
(2) Select the desired title in the menu settings, then press the dial.
The title flashes.
(3) Change the color, size, or background color.
If you do not need to change them, go to Step 4 (p. 104).
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the color, size, or background
color, then press the dial. The item appears.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.
(4) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.
CCD-TRV418
E A S Y D U B B I N G
S T A R T
0:00:00
E A S Y D U B B I N G
L E S E L
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
T
I
T
1
2
3
T
I
T
L E S E L
O F F
M O D E S E L
S E T U P
O F F
HE L L O
HA P P Y
!
B
I
R T HDA Y
DA Y S
CONGRA T U L A T ONS
OUR E E T B A B Y
HA P P Y HO L
I
I
!
S
W
NORMAL
0:00:00
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
E A S Y D U B B I N G
L E S E L
E A S Y DU B B
T T L E
I
NG
I
T
I
T
O F F
HE L L O
HA P P Y
!
B
I
RT HDA Y
HELLO!
HA P P Y HOL
CONGRA T UL A T
OUR E E T B A B Y
I
DA Y S
I
ONS
!
S
W
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
0:00:00
E A S Y DU B B
Z E
I
NG
E A S Y DU B B
T T L E
I
NG
I
S
I
SMA L L
E A S Y DU B B
Z E
I
NG
0:00:00
S
I
L ARGE
HELLO!
HELLO!
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
103
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
Note
You can put a title only into the tape of the VCR.
Title setting
• The title color changes as follows:
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE
• The title size changes as follows:
SMALL y LARGE
• The background color changes as follows:
FADE y WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y
BLUE y BLACK
St e p 4: Se le ct in g t h e d u b b in g m o d e
You can choose either normal recording (NORMAL) or interval recording (PREVIEW).
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MODE SEL, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select NORMAL or PREVIEW, then press
the dial.
– NORMAL: You can record into the VCR normally.
– PREVIEW: You can make a time-lapse dubbing by setting the VCR to
automatically repeat five seconds’ recording and 25 seconds’
standby.
5 s
5 s
[a ]
[b]
[c]
[a ]: Recording time (VCR)
[b ]: Waiting time (VCR)
[c]: Playback time (camcorder)
25 s
30 s
25 s
30 s
E A S Y D U B B I N G
START
TITLE SEL
MODE SEL
SET UP
0:00:00
1
NORMAL
NORMAL
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
CCD-TRV418
E A S Y D U B B I N G
START
0:00:00
TITLE SEL
MODE SEL
SET UP
NORMAL
PREVIEW
NORMAL
[
] :
E A S Y D U B E N D
104
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g
St e p 5: Pe rfo rm in g Ea sy Du b b in g
Make sure that your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to
recording pause.
When you use a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VTR/ VCR. Set the
POWER switch of your camcorder to PLAYER.
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and VCR stop automatically.
Then the display returns to the Easy Dubbing initial screen.
To stop dubbing during editing
Press x on your camcorder.
To quit Easy Dubbing
Press EASY DUB.
Note
If you set the background color to FADE in Step 3 (p. 103), the picture may not appear
properly depending on the connected VCR.
You cannot record on the VCR w hen:
– The tape has run out.
– The write-protect tab is set to lock.
– The IR SETUP code is not correct.
– The button used to cancel recording pause is not correct.
NOT READY appears on the screen w hen
START is not carried out.
105
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating
the VCR.
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.
Your camcorder can dub on a “Memory Stick.” See page 156 for more information.
Unwanted scene
Unwanted scene
Switch the order
Be fo re o p e ra t io n
Step 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 107)
Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation
– with the A/ V connecting cable (p. 107 to 110)
– with the i.LINK cable (p. 111 to 112)
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 113)
When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Step 2 (p. 107 to 112) and
Step 3 (p. 113 to 114).
Usin g t h is fu n ct io n
Operation 1 Making a program (p. 115)
Operation 2 Performing the program (Dubbing a tape) (p. 118)
Note
Digital program editing does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
standard 8 mm system.
/
106
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR
You can connect either an A/ V connecting cable or an i.LINK cable.
When you use the A/ V connecting cable, connect the devices as illustrated in page 94.
When you use the i.LINK cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 96.
If you connect using the i.LINK cable
With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital
format for high-quality editing.
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR fo r o p e ra t io n w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g
ca b le
To edit using the VCR, set up your camcorder to send the control signal by infrared rays
to the remote sensor on the VCR.
When you connect using the A/ V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps
(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.
(1) Se t t h e IR SETUP co d e
1 Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to
LINE.
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/
VTR.
3 Press MENU to display the menu settings.
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
5
, then press the dial.
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press
the dial.
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
6 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
7 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.
8 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.
9 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial.
0 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP code number of your
VCR, then press the dial.
Check the code in “About the IR SETUP code” (p. 101).
107
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
MENU
5
6
7
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
1
IN
UNDO
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
1
IR
TAPE
MEMORY
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
:
:
:
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
1
IN
IR
i. LINK
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
EDIT SET
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
10
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
3
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
108
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
(2) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l t h e re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording
pause on the VCR, then press the dial.
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
IR TEST
IR TEST
RETURN
REC
PB
RETURN
] :
MENU END
[
] :
[
MENU END
Buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:
– Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.
– Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.
– Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.
(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r
Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it toward the remote
sensor of the VCR.
Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the
devices.
Infrared rays emitter
VCR
Remote sensor
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
109
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
(4) Co n firm in g VCR o p e ra t io n
1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording pause.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.
When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
2
3
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
ENGAGE
REC PAUSE
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
RETURN
EXECUTE
COMPLETE
RETURN
RETURN
] :
MENU END
[
] :
[
MENU END
Wh e n t h e VCR d o e s n o t o p e ra t e co rre ct ly
• After checking the code in “About the IR SETUP code,” set IR SETUP or
PAUSEMODE again.
• Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.
• Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
110
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR fo r o p e ra t io n w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (optional), follow the procedure below.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV
input. When you connect a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch
to VCR/ VTR.
(3) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(5)
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press the
dial.
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.
(8) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.
111
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
MENU
6
7
5
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
1
IN
UNDO
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
1
IR
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
TAPE
MEMORY
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
:
:
:
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
1
IN
IR
i. LINK
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
EDIT SET
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
8
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
i. LINK
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
Note
When editing digital video, the operation signals cannot be sent with LANC.
When you connect using an i.LINK cable
• You cannot dub the titles and display indicators.
• You may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the
VCR. Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.
112
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR
You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Have a pen and
paper ready for notes. Before operation, eject the cassette from your camcorder if
inserted.
(1) Insert a tape for recording into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording pause.
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you do not need to set the VCR to
recording pause.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
IN and OUT are recorded on an image five times each to calculate the
numerical values for adjusting the synchronization.
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen.
When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.
Take a note of the first numerical value of each IN and the last numerical
value of each OUT.
(5) Calculate the average of all the first numerical values of each IN, and the
average of all the last numerical values of each OUT.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-IN,” then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of IN,
then press the dial.
The calculated start position for recording is set.
(8) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-OUT,” then press the dial.
(9) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of OUT,
then press the dial.
The calculated stop position for recording is set.
(10)Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
RETURN, then press the dial.
113
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
2
6
3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
RETURN
[ ] :
MENU END
0 08 55 06
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
RETURN
EXECUTING
COMPLETE
EXECUTE
ENGAGE
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE –60
IR TEST
No. 5
IN
PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE
IR TEST
RETURN
RETURN
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
0
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
0
RETURN
RETURN
] :
MENU END
[
] :
[
MENU END
Notes
• When you complete step (3), the image used to adjust synchronization is recorded for
about 50 seconds.
• If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the
tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds’ lead before starting
recording.
• When you connect with the i.LINK cable, you may not be able to operate the dubbing
function correctly depending on the VCR.
Keep the i.LINK connection, and set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings.
Video and audio signals are transmitted in digital format.
114
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g a p ro g ra m
(1) Insert a tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for recording
into the VCR.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(4)
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press the
dial.
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
(5) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video
control buttons, then pause playback.
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial.
The IN point of the first program is set, and the upper part of the program
mark changes to light blue.
(7) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video control
buttons, then pause playback.
(8) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the lower part of the program
mark changes to light blue.
(9) Repeat steps (5) to (8) to set other programs.
When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.
You can set up to 20 programs.
115
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
REW
PLAY
FF
5,7
STOP
PAUSE
MENU
4
9
6
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
OUT
1
IN
1
UNDO
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
1
TAPE
MEMORY
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
SCENE
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
:
:
:
:
:
:
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 09 07 06
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 08 55 06
1
IN
2
IN
UNDO
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
EDIT SET
:
:
:
:
1
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
TOTAL 0 00 12 00
SCENE
0
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0 10 01 23
4
IN
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
:
3
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 47 12
SCENE
[
] :
MENU END
116
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t
Erase OUT first and then IN of the last program.
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.
To cancel erasing
Select RETURN in step (2).
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s
(1)
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press the
dial.
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
(2) Select ERASE ALL in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to
select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.
To cancel erasing all programs
Select RETURN in step (2).
To cancel the program you have set
Press MENU.
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.
Notes
• Digital program editing does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
/
standard 8 mm system.
• You cannot dub the title or display indicators. However, you can dub the title which
has already been recorded on a tape.
• You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing on a tape.
You cannot set IN or OUT to the follow ing portions of the tape:
– A portion recorded in Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system
– A blank portion of the tape
The total time may not be displayed correctly in the follow ing cases:
– The tape is recorded in the Hi8 / standard 8 mm system.
– There is a blank portion between IN and OUT on the tape.
117
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g a t a p e )
Make sure that your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to
recording pause.
When you use an i.LINK cable, setting the VCR to recording pause is not necessary.
When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.
(1)
Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to
select TAPE, then press the dial.
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
(2) Select START in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
Your camcorder searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts
dubbing.
The program mark flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator
appears during edit on the screen.
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing ends.
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.
Then the display returns to the VIDEO EDIT initial screen.
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g
Press x on your camcorder.
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g
Press MENU.
You cannot record on the VCR w hen:
– The cassette has run out of tape.
– The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.
– The IR SETUP code is not correct (when IR is selected).
– The button to cancel recording pause is not correct (when IR is selected).
NOT READY appears on the screen w hen:
– The program to operate Digital program editing has not been made.
– i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable is not connected.
– The power of the connected VCR is not turned on (when i.LINK is selected).
118
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
You can record a tape from another VCR or TV program from TV that has video/ audio
outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.
Before operation
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder. If you want to record a tape
from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,
then immediately press X on your camcorder.
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select
a TV program if you record from TV.
The picture from the TV or VCR appears on the screen of your camcorder.
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording
from.
3
PAUSE
REC
TV
Yellow
White
S VIDEO
OUT
S VIDEO
AUDIO/
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
A/ V connecting cable
(supplied)
VCR
Red
: Signal flow
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
119
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
Notes
• To enable smooth transition, we recommend that you do not mix pictures recorded in
the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm with the Digital8 system on a tape.
• If you do fast-forward or slow-playback on the other equipment, the image being
recorded may fluctuate. When recording from other equipment, be sure to play back
the original tape at normal speed.
If your VCR or TV is a monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,
the right channel audio is output.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
TV or VCR.
120
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le
You can record a tape from a VCR that has DV outputs. Use your camcorder as a
recorder.
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to DV of your camcorder and to DV OUT
of the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are
transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.
(1) Insert a blank tape for recording into your camcorder, and insert the recorded
tape into the VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,
then immediately press X on your camcorder.
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback.
The picture to be recorded appears on the screen of your camcorder.
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording
from.
3
PAUSE
REC
VCR
DV
DV
is marked on
this side.
DV OUT
i.LINK cable
(optional)
: Signal flow
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable.
When you dub a picture in digital form
The color of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed
picture.
121
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
If you record a paused playback picture w ith the DV jack
The recorded picture becomes rough. When you play back the picture using your
camcorder, the picture may jitter.
Before recording
Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the screen of your camcorder by
pressing DISPLAY. The DV IN indicator may appear on both equipment.
122
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR
– In se rt Ed it in g
You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by
specifying the insert start and end points.
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Connections are the same as on page 119 and 121. Insert a cassette containing the
desired scene into the VCR.
[a ]
[A]
[b ]
[c]
[B]
[C]
[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be superimposed (VCR)
[B]: A tape before editing (your camcorder)
[C]: A tape after editing (your camcorder)
123
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR – In se rt Ed it in g
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then press X
to set the VCR to the playback pause mode.
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c] by pressing m or M.
Then press X to set your camcorder to the playback pause mode.
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET
MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in
memory. The tape counter shows “0:00:00.”
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ] by pressing m. Press
z REC and the button on its right simultaneously, then immediately press X
to set your camcorder to the recording pause mode.
(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder
to start inserting the new scene.
Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the counter. Your
camcorder automatically stops. The end point [c] of the insert stored in
memory is canceled.
5
PAUSE
REC
0:00:00
4
ZERO SET
MEMORY
ZERO SET
MEMORY
To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t
Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step (5) to make the ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator disappear and begin from step (3).
124
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR – In se rt Ed it in g
Notes
• The zero set memory function does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
/
standard 8 mm system.
• Pictures and sound recorded on the section between the insert start and end points
will be erased when you insert the new scene.
• If you use the Remote Commander when dubbing a tape, the VCR may operate
accidentally. Should this happen, change the commander mode of the VCR to one
other than VTR2, or cover the sensor of the VCR with black paper.
If you insert scenes on the tape recorded on another camcorder
The pictures and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a
tape recorded on your camcorder.
When the inserted picture is played back
Pictures and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted section. This is not a
malfunction.
Pictures and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP
mode.
To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point
Skip step (3) and (4). Press x when you want to stop inserting.
125
— “ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s – Re co rd in g —
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
You can record and play back images on a “Memory Stick.” You can easily play back,
record or delete images. You can exchange image data with other equipment such as
your computer, etc., using the USB cable for a “Memory Stick” (p. 182).
See page 240 for details of “Memory Stick.”
On file fo rm a t (DCF co m p lia n t )
Still image: Exif * Ver.2.2 JPEG compliant, DPOF compatible
Moving picture: MPEG1 compliant (monaural)
* Exif:Exif is a file format for still images, established by the Japan Electronics and
Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Files in this format can
have additional information such as your camcorder's setting information at the
time of recording.
Typical image data file name
Still image
101 (up to 999)-0001: This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.
Dsc00001.jpg:
This file name appears on the display of your computer.
Moving picture
MOV00001:
Mov00001.mpg:
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.
This file name appears on the display of your computer.
“ Me m o ry St ick” fo rm a t t e d o n co m p u t e r
A “Memory Stick” formatted on Windows OS or Macintosh OS is not guaranteed to be
compatible with your camcorder.
No t e s o n im a g e d a t a co m p a t ib ilit y
• Image data files recorded on a “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform with the
Design Rule for Camera File System universal standard established by the JEITA
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). You cannot
play back on your camcorder images recorded on other equipment (DCR-TRV890E/
TRV900/ TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform with this universal
standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)
• If you cannot use the “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it
with your camcorder (p. 218). However, formatting erases all information on the
“Memory Stick.”
• You may not be able to play back the images recorded using your camcorder, on other
playback equipment.
• You may not be able to play back following images with your camcorder:
– image data modified on a computer
– image data shot with other equipment
126
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the b mark
facing the LCD panel as illustrated.
Access lamp
b mark
Eje ct in g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”
Press the “Memory Stick” once lightly.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data
from the “Memory Stick” or recording the data on the “Memory Stick.” Do not turn the
power off, eject the “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data
may become damaged.
If “
MEMORY STICK ERROR” is displayed
Reinsert “Memory Stick” a few times. The “Memory Stick” may be damaged if the
indicator is still displayed. If this occurs, use another “Memory Stick.”
If the w rite-protect tab on a “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
“
-” appears and functions using the “Memory Stick” do not work.
127
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e q u a lit y m o d e
You can select the image quality mode in still image recording. The default setting is
FINE.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
1
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET in
, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press
the dial.
1
MEM SET
1
STILL SET
QUALITY
FLD/FRAME
RETURN
3
4
5
FINE
1
2
REMAIN
50
[
] :
MENU END
MEM SET
1
STILL SET
QUALITY
FINE
FLD/FRAME STANDARD
RETURN
1
2
REMAIN
50
[
] :
MENU END
2
MEM SET
1
STILL SET
QUALITY
STANDARD
MENU
FLD/FRAME
RETURN
1
2
REMAIN
120
[
] :
MENU END
128
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Im a g e q u a lit y se t t in g s
Setting
Meaning
FINE (FINE)
Use this mode when you want to record high quality
images. The number of still images that can be
recorded on a “Memory Stick” becomes less than the
number when recorded in STANDARD. Fine images
are compressed to about 1/ 4.
STANDARD (STD)
This is the standard image quality. Standard images
are compressed to about 1/ 10.
Note
In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality,
depending on the types of images you are shooting.
Differences in image quality mode
Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored into memory. The
memory capacity allocated to each image varies depending on the selected image
quality mode. Details are shown in the table below.
Image quality mode
FINE
Memory capacity
About 150 KB
About 60 KB
STANDARD
Image quality mode indicator
The image quality mode indicator is not displayed during playback.
When you select image quality
The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on
the screen.
129
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Se le ct in g t h e m o vin g p ict u re size
You can select either of two image sizes 320 × 240 or 160 × 112.
(The default setting is 320 × 240.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MOVIE SET in
1
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size, then press the
dial.
The indicator changes as follows:
320
160
1
4
5
MEM S ET
MOV
I MAGE S
REMA
RE T URN
1
320
I
E
S E T
I
I
Z E 320 240
N
160 112
1
2
REMA
I
N
40sec
[
]
:
MENU
END
MEM S E T
MOV
1
I
E
S E T
I MAGE S
REMA
I
I
Z E 160 112
N
1
RE T URN
2
REMA
I
N
2min
MENU
[
]
:
MENU
END
The still image size
The still image size is 640 × 480 only.
130
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Mo vin g p ict u re size se t t in g s
Setting
Meaning
Indicator
320 × 240
Records 320 × 240 moving pictures.
320
160 × 112
Records 160 × 112 moving pictures.
160
Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s yo u ca n re co rd o n a
“ Me m o ry St ick”
The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality you
select and the complexity of the subject.
Type of the “Memory Stick”
Image quality
8MB
(supplied)*
(optional)*
50 images
120 images
16MB
(optional)
32MB
(optional)
64MB
(optional)
128MB
(optional)
1)
2)
FINE
96 images
190 images
485 images
390 images
980 images
780 images
STANDARD
240 images
1970 images
Ap p ro xim a t e t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s yo u ca n re co rd o n a
“ Me m o ry St ick”
The time of moving pictures you can record varies depending on which image size you
select and the complexity of the subject.
Type of the “Memory Stick”
Image size
8MB
(supplied)*
(optional)*
16MB
(optional)
32MB
(optional)
64MB
(optional)
128MB
(optional)
1)
2)
1 min.
20 sec.
2 min.
40 sec.
5 min.
20 sec.
10 min.
40 sec.
21 min.
20 sec.
320 × 240
5 min.
20 sec.
10 min.
40 sec.
21 min.
20 sec.
42 min.
40 sec.
85 min.
20 sec.
160 × 112
The tables above show approximate number of still images and times of moving
pictures you can record on a “Memory Stick” formatted on your camcorder.
When available recording time is not left on the “Memory Stick”
“
FULL” appears.
1)
*
2)
*
131
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” – Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
You can record still images on a “Memory Stick.”
You can select the FIELD or FRAME mode in still image recording. Your camcorder
compensates for camera-shake when recording moving subjects in the FIELD mode.
Your camcorder records in high quality in the FRAME mode. Select the FIELD or
FRAME in the menu settings (p. 217). (The default setting is FIELD.)
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the desired still image appears. The green
z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the image and focus
are adjusted and fixed while your camcorder targets at the middle of the
image. Recording does not start yet.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The shutter sounds, and the image becomes still.
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the
“Memory Stick.”
2
FINE
26
101
3
FINE
1
101
Yo u ca n re co rd st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” in CAMERA
m o d e .
For details, see page 53.
132
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Notes
• When recording fast-moving subjects in the FRAME mode, the recorded image
appears blurry.
• When recording in the FRAME mode, your camcorder may not correct camera-
shake. We recommend that you shoot objects with a tripod.
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY
The following functions do not work:
– Wide mode
– Fader
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
– Picture effect
– Digital effect
– Titles
While you are recording a still image
You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press
the button.
When you press PHOTO lightly in step (2)
The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.
Data code
The data code (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed while
recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the “Memory Stick.”
To display the data code, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during
playback.
133
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e re co rd in g
Image quality
1300
FINE
Approximate number of still images that can be
recorded on the “Memory Stick.”
–––
–––
101
Current recording folder
Notes
• The current recording folder indicator shows the folder in which images are recorded.
• The number of images can be recorded on a “Memory Stick” is displayable up to 9999.
Even if the “Memory Stick” has a capacity of 10 000 images or more, it is still
displayed as >9999.
The indication of the number of recordable still images
Depending on the image quality setting and the complexity of the subject, the indication
of the remaining number of recordable still images may not change even after you
record an image.
In CAMERA or VCR mode
• The current recording folder indicator is displayed for about five seconds in the
following cases:
– When a “Memory Stick” is inserted
– When the POWER switch is set to another position
• The current recording folder indicator is displayed while your camcorder is capturing
an image or recording a still image on a “Memory Stick.”
The current recording folder indicator takes priority over the 16 BIT indicator (audio
mode) when it is displayed.
134
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Se lf-t im e r m e m o ry p h o t o re co rd in g
You can record still images on “Memory Stick”s with the self-timer. You can also use
the Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(5) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(6) Press PHOTO deeper.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.
PHOTO
PHOTO
CAMERA SET
SELFTIMER
OFF
ON
4
D
ZOOM
STEADYSHOT
N. S. LIGHT
RETURN
1
2
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings while your camcorder is in the standby
mode. You cannot cancel self-timer with the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:
– Self-timer recording is finished.
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
135
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill
im a g e s
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape in the Digital8
system, and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.”
Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data through the input connector and
record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.”
Before operation
• Insert a tape recorded in the Digital8 system into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press N. Moving pictures recorded on the tape are played back.
(3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the tape freezes.
The CAPTURE indicator appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet.
To change the still image, release PHOTO and select a still image again.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator
disappears. The image displayed on the screen when you pressed PHOTO
deeper will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.” Playback of the tape is
resumed.
FINE
50
CAPTURE
2
3
4
PLAY
101
FINE
101
136
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Do not shake or knock the unit. Also do not turn the power off, eject the “Memory
Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.
If the
indicator appears on the screen
The inserted “Memory Stick” is incompatible with your camcorder because its format
does not conform with your camcorder. Check the format of the “Memory Stick.”
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode
Your camcorder stops momentarily.
Sound recorded on a tape
You cannot record audio from a tape.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press
the button.
Titles superimposed on tapes
You cannot record titles on the “Memory Stick.” However, you can record titles which
have already been recorded on tapes.
Data code
The data code (date/ time) when it is recorded on the “Memory Stick” from a tape is
recorded.
The data code (various settings) is not recorded.
The data codes recorded on a tape are not recorded.
While recording images from a tape as still images
The image is recorded in the FRAME mode automatically even if you select FIELD in
the menu settings.
Recording folder
You cannot change the recording folder.
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is
used (p. 162).
137
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t
Before operation
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.) (p. 222)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.
The picture from TV or VCR appears on the screen of your camcorder.
(3) Follow steps (3) and (4) on page 136.
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
TV
Yellow
OUT
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO/
VIDEO
VCR
: Signal flow
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack on the
VCR or the TV.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
TV or VCR.
138
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le
VCR
DV
DV OUT
DV
i.LINK cable
(optional)
is marked on
this side.
: Signal flow
Note
In the following instances, “
REC ERROR” is displayed and recording is not possible.
Record distortion-free images:
– When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has
been repeatedly used for dubbing.
– Between scenes or in the various playback modes on the tape recorded in Hi8
standard 8 mm system.
/
– When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception
when a TV tuner unit is in use.
139
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e
“ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the “Memory Stick” on the
moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape
or a “Memory Stick” as still images.
M. CHROM (memory chroma key)
You can swap only the blue area of a still image, such as an illustration or a frame, with
a moving picture.
M. LUMI (memory luminance key)
You can swap a brighter area of a still image, such as a handwritten illustration or a
title, with a moving picture. Recording a title on the “Memory Stick” before a trip or
event is recommended.
C. CHROM (camera chroma key)
You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image such as an image that can be
used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. Only the blue area of
the moving image will be swapped with the still image.
M. OVERLAP * (memory overlap)
You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image recorded on the “Memory
Stick” as the overlap function.
Still image
Moving picture
M. CHROM
Blue
Still image
Moving picture
M. LUMI
Still image
Still image
Moving picture
C. CHROM
Blue
Moving picture
M. OVERLAP *
* The superimposed image using M. OVERLAP can be recorded on tapes only.
140
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a t a p e
Before operation
• Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” containing still images into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
(2) In the standby mode, press MEMORY MIX.
The first recorded image appears in the bottom-right corner of the screen as a
thumbnail image. The last image that is used in MEMORY MIX will be
displayed next time.
(3) Press MEMORY+/ – to select the still image you want to superimpose.
– : To see the previous image
+ : To see the next image
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.
The mode changes as follows:
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM y M. OVERLAP
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The still image overlaps with the picture on the screen.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.
M. CHROM – The degree of the blue areas in the still image which is to be
swapped with a moving picture
M. LUMI
– The brightness of the area in the still image which is to be
swapped with a moving picture
C. CHROM – The degree of the blue areas in the moving picture which is to
be swapped with a still image
M. OVERLAP – No adjustment necessary
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect becomes.
(7) Press START/ STOP to start recording.
START/STOP
2
MEMORY
MIX
M. LUMI
4
M. CHROM
101
101–0021
101
101–0021
M. LUMI III••••
5
6
101
Still image
101–0021
M. LUMI I••••••
3
101
101–0021
141
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o su p e rim p o se
Do either of the following:
– Press MEMORY+/ – before step (7).
– Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step
(3).
To ch a n g e t h e m o d e se t t in g
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step (4).
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX
Press MEMORY MIX.
Notes
• You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick.”
• When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of
the picture may not be clear.
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment
You may not be able to play modified images back with your camcorder.
When you select M. OVERLAP
You cannot change the still image or the mode setting.
During recording
You cannot change the mode setting.
Sample images
• The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder is already stored with the
protected 20 images
:
– For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) 101-0001 to 101-0018
– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 101-0019 to 101-0020
• The CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder is already stored with 20 images (p. 191):
– For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) DSC 00001 to DSC 00018
– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) DSC 00019 to DSC 00020
142
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” a s a st ill
im a g e
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” containing still images into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MEMORY MIX.
The first recorded image appears in the bottom-right corner of the screen as a
thumbnail image. The last image that is used in MEMORY MIX will be
displayed next time.
(3) Press MEMORY+/ – to select the still image you want to superimpose.
– : To see the previous image
+ : To see the next image
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.
The mode changes as follows:
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The still image overlaps with the picture on the screen.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.
M. CHROM
M. LUMI
– The degree of the blue areas in the still image which is to be
swapped with a moving picture
– The brightness of the area in the still image which is to be
swapped with a moving picture
C. CHROM
– The degree of the blue areas in the moving picture which is
to be swapped with a still image
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect becomes.
(7) Press PHOTO deeply to start recording.
The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a “Memory Stick.”
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
143
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
PHOTO
2
MEMORY
MIX
M. LUMI
4
M. CHROM
101
101
101–0021
101
101
101–0021
M. LUMI III••••
5
6
Still image
101
101
101–0021
M. LUMI I••••••
3
101
101
101–0021
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o su p e rim p o se
Do either of the following:
– Press MEMORY+/ – before step (7).
– Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step
(3).
To ch a n g e t h e m o d e se t t in g
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step (4).
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX
Press MEMORY MIX.
144
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
Notes
• You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick.”
• When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of
the picture may not be clear.
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment
You may not be able to play modified images back with your camcorder.
During recording
You cannot change the mode setting.
When using MEMORY MIX in MEMORY mode
The PROGRAM AE function does not work. (The indicator flashes.)
Recording folder
You cannot change the recording folder.
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is
used (p. 162).
Sample images
• The “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder is already stored with the
protected 20 images
:
– For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) 101-0001 to 101-0018
– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 101-0019 to 101-0020
• The CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder is already stored with 20 images (p. 191):
– For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) DSC 00001 to DSC 00018
– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) DSC 00019 to DSC 00020
145
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” – MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
You can record moving pictures with sound on a “Memory Stick.”
The picture and sound are recorded up to the full capacity of a “Memory Stick” (MPEG
MOVIE EX).
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording
lamp lights up.
The picture and sound are recorded up to the capacity of a “Memory Stick.”
For more information about recording time, see page 131.
50min 320REC
0:00:03
1min
2
BBB
101
To st o p re co rd in g
Press START/ STOP.
Notes
• Sound is recorded in monaural.
• The moving picture files recorded on your camcorder cannot be played back on other
camcorders without the folder creation function.
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY
The following functions do not work:
– Wide mode
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
– Fader
– Picture effect
– Digital effect
– Titles
146
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
– MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
When using an external flash (optional)
Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on a “Memory
Stick.”
Otherwise, the charging sound for the flash may be recorded.
Data code
The data code (date/ time) are not displayed while recording. However, they are
automatically recorded onto the “Memory Stick.”
To display the data code (date/ time), press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander
during playback.
The data code (various settings) cannot be recorded.
During recording on “Memory Stick”
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. While ejecting the tape, the sound is
recorded on the “Memory Stick.”
147
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
– MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
Image size
Recording time
0:00:05
1min
320 REC
Approximate recording time of moving pictures that
can be recorded on the “Memory Stick”
BBB
This indicator is displayed for five seconds after
pressing START/ STOP. This indicator is not recorded.
–––
–––
101
Current recording folder
Note
The current recording folder indicator indicates the folder in which images are
recorded.
In VCR mode
• The current recording folder indicator is displayed for about five seconds in the
following cases:
– When a “Memory Stick” is inserted
– When the POWER switch is set to another position
• The current recording folder indicator is displayed while your camcorder is recording
a moving picture on a “Memory Stick.”
148
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
– MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
Se lf-t im e r MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
You can record moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. You can also
use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(5) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(6) Press START/ STOP.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.
START/STOP
START/
STOP
CAMERA SET
SELFTIMER
OFF
ON
4
D
ZOOM
STEADYSHOT
N. S. LIGHT
RETURN
1
2
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n
Press START/ STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode. You cannot cancel
self-timer with the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:
– Self-timer recording is finished.
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
149
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a
m o vin g p ict u re
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on tapes and record it as a
moving picture on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also capture moving picture
data through the input connector and record it as a moving picture on a “Memory
Stick.”
The picture and sound are recorded up to the full capacity of a “Memory Stick” (MPEG
MOVIE EX).
Before operation
• Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.
And press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.
(3) Press START/ STOP on your camcorder.
Images and sound are recorded up to the remaining capacity of the “Memory
Stick.” For more information about recording time, see page 131.
3
PLAY
PAUSE
2
50min
N
REC
0:15:42:43
0:00:03
1min
320
BBB
101
To st o p re co rd in g
Press START/ STOP.
150
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
Notes
• Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording pictures from
a tape to a “Memory Stick.”
• Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from a tape.
• The moving picture files recorded on your camcorder cannot be played back on other
camcorders without the folder creation function.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Do not shake or knock your camcorder. Also, do not set the POWER switch to OFF,
eject a “Memory Stick” or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data may become
damaged.
Titles
You cannot record titles on the “Memory Stick.” However, you can record titles which
have already been recorded on tapes.
Data code
The data code (date/ time) when it is recorded on the “Memory Stick” from a tape is
recorded.
The data code (various settings) is not recorded.
The data codes recorded on a tape are not recorded.
If “
AUDIO ERROR” is displayed
Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded on the tape.
Connect external equipment with the A/ V connecting cable and input images played
back on it (p. 152).
The picture may be recorded on the “Memory Stick” incorrectly if:
– You turn the POWER switch during recording.
– You press any video control buttons during recording.
– Between the scenes recorded in the Digital8 system and in the Hi8
standard 8 mm system.
/
– A blank portion of the tape.
– The scenes when the input signal is cut off.
Recording folder
You cannot change the recording folder.
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is
used (p. 162).
151
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t
Before operation
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.
The picture of the other equipment is displayed on the screen or viewfinder.
(3) Press START/ STOP at the point where you want to start recording from.
Images and sound are recorded up to the remaining capacity of the “Memory
Stick.” For more information about recording time, see page 131.
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
S VIDEO
TV
Yellow
OUT
White
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO/
VIDEO
AUDIO
VCR
A/ V connecting
cable (supplied)
: Signal flow
Red
If your VCR or TV is a monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,
the right channel audio is output.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
TV or VCR.
152
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le
VCR
DV
DV OUT
DV
i.LINK cable
(optional)
is marked on
this side.
: Signal flow
Note
In the following instances, recording is discontinued or “
REC ERROR” is displayed
and image data is not saved:
– When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has
been repeatedly used for dubbing.
– Between scenes or in the various playback modes on the tape recorded in Hi8
standard 8 mm system.
/
– When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception
when a TV tuner unit is in use.
– When the input signal is cut off.
During recording on “Memory Stick”
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. During ejecting of the tape, the
sound is recorded on the “Memory Stick.”
153
In t e rva l Ph o t o re co rd in g
You can take photos successively at regular
intervals. You can achieve an excellent
recording for flowering, emergence, etc.,
with this function.
[a]
[a]
[a]
Each recording makes each still image file.
[b]
[b]
[a]: Recording
[b]: Interval time (INTERVAL)
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INT.R -STL in 2 , then press the dial
(p. 218).
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.
(5) Set INTERVAL.
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then
press the dial.
The time: 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
RETURN, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(7) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The INTERVAL MEM
STILL indicator flashes.
(8) Press PHOTO deeper to start interval photo recording. The INTERVAL MEM
STILL indicator lights up.
154
In t e rva l Ph o t o re co rd in g
8
3,4
MEM SET 2
MEM SET 2
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R --STL
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R --STL
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
ON
OFF
SET
OFF
1
2
1
2
RETURN
RETURN
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
5
MEM SET 2
INT. R --STL
INTERVAL
RETURN
MEM SET 2
INT. R --STL
INTERVAL
RETURN
MEM SET 2
1 MIN
1 MIN
5 MIN
10 MIN
SLIDE SHOW
6
ON
INT. R
–STL
1
2
1
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
2
1
2
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
7
I NTERVAL
MEM ST I LL
MENU
To ca n ce l in t e rva l p h o t o re co rd in g
Perform either of the following:
– Set INT.R -STL to OFF in the menu settings.
– Set the POWER switch to a position other than MEMORY.
To p e rfo rm n o rm a l p h o t o re co rd in g d u rin g t h e in t e rva l t im e
You can perform normal photo recording only once during the interval time. Press
PHOTO. The INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator flashes, and normal photo recording
starts. To resume interval photo recording, press PHOTO again. The INTERVAL MEM
STILL indicator lights up and interval photo recording restarts.
On interval time
The actual interval time may not be exactly the same as the selected time.
155
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g
p ict u re – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a
“ Me m o ry St ick” )
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a “Memory Stick.”
The picture and sound are recorded up to the full capacity of a “Memory Stick” (MPEG
MOVIE EX).
Before operation
• Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size in
IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video
control buttons, then pause playback.
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial.
The IN point of the first program is set, and the upper part of the program
mark changes to light blue.
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video control
buttons, then pause playback.
(9) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the lower part of the program
mark changes to light blue.
(10) Repeat steps (6) to (9) to set other programs.
When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.
You can set 20 programs in maximum.
156
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g p ict u re
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )
REW
PLAY
FF
6,8
STOP
PAUSE
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
0:08:55:06
OUT
1
2
4
7
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
IMAGESIZE
TOTAL 0:00:00
0
2min
SCENE
320
[
] :
MENU END
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
IMAGESIZE
0:08:58:06
IN
9
TOTAL 0:00:03
1
2min
SCENE
320
[
] :
MENU END
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
IMAGESIZE
0:10:01:23
IN
10
MENU
TOTAL 0:00:13
3
2min
SCENE
320
[
] :
MENU END
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t
Erase OUT first and then IN of the last program.
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.
To cancel erasing
Select RETURN in step (2).
157
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g p ict u re
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu setting. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to
select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(2) Select ERASE ALL. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then
press the dial.
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.
To cancel erasing all programs
Select RETURN in step (2).
To cancel a program you have set
Press MENU.
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.
Notes
• Digital program editing does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8
/
standard 8 mm system.
• You cannot dub the title or display indicators. However, you can dub the title which
has already been recorded on a tape.
• You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing on a “Memory Stick.”
• The moving picture files recorded on your camcorder cannot be played back on other
camcorders without the folder creation function.
You cannot set IN or OUT to the follow ing portions of the tape:
– A portion recorded in Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system
– A blank portion of the tape
The total time may not be displayed correctly in the follow ing cases:
– The tape is recorded in the Hi8 / standard 8 mm system.
– There is a blank portion between IN and OUT on the tape.
While making a program
If you eject the cassette, NOT READY appears on the screen. The program will be
erased.
Recording folder
You cannot change the recording folder.
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is
used (p. 162).
158
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g p ict u re
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )
Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g o n t o a “ Me m o ry St ick” )
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu setting. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to
select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(2) Select START. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press
the dial.
Your camcorder searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts
dubbing.
The program mark flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, the EDITING indicator and the
REC indicator appear during writing of data on your camcorder, and the REC
indicator appears during dubbing on the “Memory Stick.”
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete.
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.
Then the display returns to the VIDEO EDIT initial screen.
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g
Press x using the video control buttons.
The program you made is recorded on a “Memory Stick” up to the place where you
press x.
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g
Press MENU.
Note
A blank portion may not be recorded on the “Memory Stick” correctly.
NOT READY appears on the screen w hen:
– The program to operate Digital program editing has not been made.
– The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
When the “Memory Stick” does not have enough space to record
The LOW MEMORY indicator appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures
up to the time indicated.
When available recording time is not left on the “Memory Stick”
“MEMORY FULL” appears.
159
Se t t in g u p a fo ld e r
You can create folders in a “Memory stick” and group recorded images in them.
You can group images by selecting a folder for each recording, for convenient later
reference.
Images are recorded in the 101MSDCF folder unless other folders have been created.
You can create folders up to 999MSDCF.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory stick” into your camcorder.
Cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select NEW FOLDER in
1
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ADD, then press the dial.
A new folder is created. The numeric part of the folder name is one larger than
that of the last created folder. The image you record next time is stored in this
newly created folder.
1
3
MEM SET 1
MEM SET 1
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER ADD
REC FOLDER
1
2
1
2
FILE NO.
CURRENTLY
101MSDCF
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
PB FOLDER
RETURN
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
PB FOLDER
RETURN
] :
MENU END
[
[
] :
MENU END
4
MEM SET 1
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER ADD
REC FOLDER
MEM SET 1
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
ADD
RETURN
1
1
2
FILE NO.
2
PRINT MARK CURRENTLY
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
PB FOLDER
RETURN
ADD FOLDER
102MSDCF
PROTECT
PB FOLDER
RETURN
102MSDCF
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r
Press
RETURN in step (4).
160
Se t t in g u p a fo ld e r
Notes
• You cannot create folders in the following cases:
– No “Memory Stick” is inserted.
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
– Folders have already been created in the “Memory Stick” up to the limit (up to
folder 999MSDCF), or a folder named 999MSDCF already exists.
• If you try to record an image in a folder that already contains 9999 images, or the
folder contains an image named Dsc09999.jpg or Mov09999.mpg, a new folder is
created automatically and the image is recorded in there.
• Folders cannot be deleted with your camcorder.
The folder in w hich images are recorded
Images will be recorded in the same folder until you select another folder or create a
new folder.
161
Se t t in g u p a fo ld e r
Se le ct in g a re co rd in g fo ld e r
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select REC FOLDER in
1
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired folder, then press the dial.
The image you record next time is recorded in this folder.
1
3
MEM SET 1
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER 101MSDCF
1
FILE NO.
2
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
PB FOLDER
RETURN
] :
MENU END
[
4
101
REC FOLDER
DATE:
JUL
12 : 24 : 00 AM
FILES: 40
101MSDCF
102MSDCF
103MSDCF
104MSDCF
105MSDCF
106MSDCF
107MSDCF
4
2003
[a]
[b]
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[a]: The date when the folder is created
[b]: The number of the files stored in the folder
To ca n ce l se le ct in g a re co rd in g fo ld e r
Press
RETURN in step (3).
Note
You cannot select a recording folder in the following cases:
– No “Memory Stick” is inserted.
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
– Folder 100 MSDCF (The folder is only for playback).
162
— “ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s – Pla yb a ck —
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck
You can play back still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” By selecting the index
screen, you can also play back six images including moving pictures at a time arranged
in the same order they are in the “Memory Stick.”
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.
(3) Press MEMORY +/ – to select the desired still image.
– : To see the previous image
+ : To see the next image
2
3
PLAY
To st o p m e m o ry p h o t o p la yb a ck
Press MEMORY PLAY.
Note
You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:
– When playing back image data modified on your computer.
– When playing back image data shot with other equipment.
163
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck
Notes on the file name
• The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed
if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.
• The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.
To play back recorded images on a TV screen
• Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder (p. 51).
• When operating memory photo playback on a TV or the LCD screen, image quality
may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good
as ever.
• Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be
output from the TV speakers.
When there is only one folder on the “Memory Stick” and no image is in it
“
NO FILE” appears.
PB (playback) folder
You can select the PB folder only in MEMORY mode.
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck
Image number/
Total number of recorded images in the
current PB folder
101
1 / 40
MEMORY PLAY
101-0001
Current PB (playback) folder
Print mark
Protect
JUL 4 2003
12:05:56 PM
Data code
Data file name
Wh e n a “ Me m o ry St ick” co n t a in s m u lt ip le fo ld e rs
The following marks appear on the first and last images in a folder.
: You can move to the previous folder.
: You can move to the next folder.
: You can move to both the previous and the next folder.
Data code
You can view data code (date/ time or various settings when recorded) by pressing
DATA CODE on the Remote Commander.
To make the indicators disappear
Press DISPLAY.
164
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck
Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )
You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when
searching for a particular image.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index screen.
2
INDEX
A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to
the index screen mode.
+ : To see the next images
– : To see the previous images
B mark
1
4
2
5
3
6
101
1 / 40
101-0001
To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )
Press MEMORY +/ – to move the B mark to the image you want to display on full
screen, then press MEMORY PLAY.
Note
When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This
indicates the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick.” These
numbers are different from the data file names (p. 126).
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment
These files are sometimes not displayed on the index screen.
165
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s
– MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
You can play back moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick.” By selecting the
index screen, you can also play back six images including still images at a time arranged
in the same order they are in the “Memory Stick.”
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.
(3) Press MEMORY +/ – to select the desired moving pictures.
– : To see the previous picture
+ : To see the next picture
(4) Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to start playback.
(5) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.
– : To turn the volume down
+ : To turn the volume up
2
PLAY
3
4
5
MPEG
VOLUME
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
166
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s – MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
Note
You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:
– When playing back image data modified on your computer.
– When playing back image data shot with other equipment.
To play back recorded images on a TV screen
• Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder (p. 51).
• Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be
output from the TV speakers.
When there is only one folder on the “Memory Stick” and no image is in it
“
NO FILE” appears.
PB (playback) folder
You can select the PB folder only in MEMORY mode.
Pla yin g b a ck a m o vin g p ict u re fro m t h e d e sire d p a rt
The moving picture recorded on a “Memory Stick” is divided into 60 parts.
You can select any point and play back the picture.
(1) Follow steps (1) to (3) on page 166.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and select the point where you want to start
playback, then press the dial.
R : To see the next part
r : To see the previous part
As you turn the dial to select the playback scene you want, the bar and counter
change to indicate the playback point.
101
50min
2/20
320
MOV00001
0:00:50
–––
–––
(3) Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to start playback.
(4) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.
– : To turn the volume down
+ : To turn the volume up
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
167
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s – MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
When recording time is not long
The moving picture may not be divided into 60 parts.
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck
Image size
Picture number/ Total number of recorded
pictures in the current PB folder
101
2 / 20
320
MOV00001
0:00:12
Current PB (playback) folder
Playback time
Protect
JUL 4 2003
12:05:56 PM
Data code (date/ time)
(Various settings are displayed as “– – –”.)
Data file name
Data code (date/time)
You can view the data code (date/ time) by pressing DATA CODE on the Remote
Commander during playback.
To make the indicators disappear
Press DISPLAY.
168
Se le ct in g a fo ld e r t o vie w
You can select a folder to view images in it.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PB FOLDER in
(p. 217).
1
, then press the dial
(4) Press MEMORY +/ – to select the desired folder.
– : To view the previous folder
+ : To view the next folder
The first image in the current selected PB folder and the folder information are
displayed.
(5) Press MENU when you find the folder that contains images you want to view.
Press MEMORY +/ – to select the desired image in the folder.
3
PB FOLDER
101
MEM SET 1
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
FOLDER NAME:
DATE:
101MSDCF
JUL
4
2003
12 : 05 : 56 PM
40
[a]
[b]
1
2
FILES:
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
READY
PB FOLDER
RETURN
] :
MENU END
[+] / [--] : SELECT
[
] :
MENU END
[
MENU
4,5
[a]: The date when the folder is created
[b]: The number of the files stored in the folder
To ca n ce l se le ct in g t h e fo ld e r
Press
RETURN in step (3).
Note
Folders created, or renamed with your computer may not be recognized by your
camcorder.
Current PB folder
The current PB folder is valid until the next recording is made. Once you record an
image, the current recording folder becomes the current PB folder.
When no image is in the PB folder
“NO FILE AVAILABLE” appears.
169
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” t o a t a p e
You can copy still images recorded on a “Memory Stick” to a tape.
Before operation
• Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Using the video control buttons, search for a point where you want to record
the desired still image. Set the tape to playback pause mode.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder.
The tape is set to the recording pause mode.
(4) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.
(5) Press MEMORY+/ – to select the desired image.
– : To see the previous image
+ : To see the next image
(6) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop.
The z indicator appears on the screen during recording.
(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps (5) to (6).
2
3
REC
6
4
5
PLAY
PAUSE
To st o p co p yin g
Press x.
170
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” t o a t a p e
During copying
You cannot operate the following buttons:
– MEMORY PLAY
– MEMORY INDEX
– MEMORY DELETE
– MEMORY MIX
– MEMORY +/ –
Note on the index screen
You cannot record the index screen.
If you press EDITSEARCH during pause mode
Memory playback stops.
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment
You may not be able to copy modified images with your camcorder.
When copying movies
After step (6), press the MPEG NX button or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and play back the
image.
171
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a
“ Me m o ry St ick” – Me m o ry PB ZOOM
You can enlarge still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can select and view a
desired part from the enlarged still image. Also, you can copy the desired part of the
enlarged still image to a tape.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PB ZOOM on your camcorder while you are playing back images
recorded on the “Memory Stick.” The center of the image is enlarged to about
twice its size, and
appear on the screen.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the
dial.
: To view the upper part of the image
: To view the lower part of the image
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the
dial.
: To view the left part of the image (Turn the dial downward.)
: To view the right part of the image (Turn the dial upward.)
(5) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.
You can enlarge the image from 1.1 times up to five times its size.
W : To decrease the zoom ratio
T : To increase the zoom ratio
2
PB ZOOM
PB ZOOM
× 2.0
3
5
[
]
EXEC : T t
PB ZOOM
× 2.0
4
[
]
EXEC : r R
172
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
– Me m o ry PB ZOOM
To ca n ce l Me m o ry PB ZOOM
Press PB ZOOM.
Memory PB ZOOM is canceled w hen the follow ing buttons are pressed:
– MENU
– MEMORY PLAY
– MEMORY INDEX
– MEMORY +/ –
Moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick”
Memory PB ZOOM does not work.
To copy the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM to a tape
See page 170.
173
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s co n t in u o u sly
– SLIDE SHOW
Your camcorder can play back images in sequence automatically. This function is useful
especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
2
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW in
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.
ALL FILES: All images in the “Memory Stick” are played back continuously.
FOLDER sss*: All images in the current PB folder are played back
continuously.
* sss stands for the folder number.
(5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the
“Memory Stick” in sequence.
The slide show ends after all images have been played back.
2
MENU
3
101
MEM SET
2
MEM SET
SLIDE SHOW RETURN
INT. R –STL ALL FILES
DELETE ALL FOLDER 101
FORMAT
RETURN
2
SLIDE SHOW
101 – 0021
21/40
SLIDE SHOW READY
INT. R –STL
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
5
PLAY
1
2
1
2
RETURN
[
] :
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
M
PLAY START MENU END
To ca n ce l t h e slid e sh o w
Select RETURN in step (4), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
To p a u se d u rin g a slid e sh o w
Press MEMORY PLAY.
To st a rt t h e slid e sh o w fro m a p a rt icu la r im a g e
Select the desired image using MEMORY +/ – buttons before step (2).
174
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s co n t in u o u sly – SLIDE SHOW
To view recorded images on TV
Before operation, connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder (p. 51).
If you change the “Memory Stick” during operation
The slide show does not operate. If you change the “Memory Stick,” be sure to follow
the steps again from the beginning.
175
Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re
– Im a g e p ro t e ct io n
You can protect selected images to prevent accidental erasure.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image you want to protect.
(3) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PROTECT in 1 , then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The - mark is displayed
beside the data file name of the protected image.
MEM SET
1
21/40
MEM SET
1
21/40
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
4
5
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
OFF
ON
PB FOLDER
RETURN
PB FOLDER OFF
RETURN
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
3,6
MEM SET
1
21/40
MEM SET
1
21/40
STILL SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
ON
ON
MENU
PB FOLDER OFF
RETURN
PB FOLDER
RETURN
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n
Select OFF in step (5), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The - mark disappears from the image.
Note
Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected
image data. Before formatting a “Memory Stick,” check its contents.
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
You cannot protect images.
176
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE
You can delete images stored in a “Memory Stick.” You can delete all images or only
selected images.
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image you want to delete.
(3) Press MEMORY DELETE. The message DELETE? appears on the screen.
(4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted.
101
DELETE
101–0021
21/40
3
DELETE
DELETE?
[
] :
DELETE DEL
[
] :
– CANCEL
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e
Press MEMORY – in step (4).
To d e le t e a n im a g e d isp la ye d o n t h e in d e x scre e n
Press MEMORY +/ – to move the B indicator to the image and follow steps (3) and (4).
Notes
• You cannot delete a protected image. To delete a protected image, first cancel image
protection.
• Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Before deleting an image, carefully
check the image.
• Even if you delete the last image in the folder, the folder itself is not deleted.
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
You cannot delete images.
177
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE
De le t in g a ll im a g e s
You can delete all unprotected images in a “Memory Stick.”
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL in
2
, then press the
dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.
ALL FILES: All unprotected images in the “Memory Stick” are deleted.
FOLDER sss*: All unprotected images in the current PB folder are deleted.
* sss stands for the folder number.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes
to EXECUTE.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The
DELETING indicator flashes on the screen. When all unprotected images are
deleted, The COMPLETE indicator is displayed.
MEM SET
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R STL
DELETE ALL READY
FORMAT
RETURN
2
MEM SET
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R STL
2
–
–
3
5
6
DELETE ALL RETURN
1
2
1
2
FORMAT
RETURN
ALL FILES
FOLDER 102
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MEM SET
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R STL
2
MEM SET
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R STL
2
2
–
–
DELETE ALL RETURN
DELETE ALL RETURN
1
2
FORMAT
RETURN
OK
1
2
FORMAT
RETURN
EXECUTE
ALL FILES
ALL FILES
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MEM SET
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R STL
2
MEM SET
SLIDE SHOW
INT. R STL
2
–
–
DELETE ALL DELETING
FORMAT
DELETE ALL COMPLETE
FORMAT
1
2
1
2
RETURN
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
178
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s
Select RETURN in step (4) or (5), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
Note
You cannot delete the folders with your camcorder.
While the DELETING indicator appears
Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
You cannot delete images.
179
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk – PRINT MARK
You can specify a recorded still image to print out by writing a print mark. This
function is useful for printing out still images later.
Your camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for
specifying still images to print out.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch
is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the still image you want to write a print mark on.
(3) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
1
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PRINT MARK in
, then press the
dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The
mark is displayed
beside the data file name of the image with a print mark.
MEM SET
1
21/40
MEM SET
1
21/40
STILL SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
4
5
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
PRINT MARK OFF
PROTECT
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK ON
PROTECT
PB FOLDER
RETURN
OFF
PB FOLDER
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MEM SET
1
21/40
MEM SET
1
21/40
3,6
STILL SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
MOVIE SET
NEW FOLDER
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
PRINT MARK ON
PROTECT
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK ON
PROTECT
PB FOLDER
RETURN
OFF
PB FOLDER
RETURN
MENU
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
MENU END
To ca n ce l w rit in g o f p rin t m a rks
Select OFF in step (5), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The mark disappears from the image.
180
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk – PRINT MARK
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
You cannot write print marks on still images.
Moving pictures
You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.
While the file name is flashing
You cannot write the print mark on the still image.
181
— Vie w in g Im a g e s o n Yo u r Co m p u t e r —
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– In t ro d u ct io n
The following are ways of connecting the camcorder to a computer to view images
saved on a “Memory Stick”*
, recorded on tape or live from your
camcorder on your computer.
* To view images on a computer which has a Memory Stick slot, first remove the
“Memory Stick” from the camcorder and then insert it into the computer’s Memory
Stick slot.
Camcorder Connection
jack
Connection
cable
Computer environment
requirements
(USB) jack
(USB) cable
(supplied)
(USB) connector,
editing software
Tape stills and
movies/ Picture
live from your
camcorder
i.LINK cable
(optional)
i.LINK connector,
editing software
DV jack
“Memory Stick”
stills and
movies
(USB) cable
(supplied)
(USB) connector,
editing software
(USB) jack
When connecting to a computer via the USB jack, complete installation of the
USB driver beforehand. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first,
you w ill not be able to install the USB driver correctly.
For details about your computer’s jacks and editing software, contact the computer
manufacturer.
182
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r
– USB St re a m in g
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
(p . 187)
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
Fo llo w t h e in st ru ct io n s in o rd e r d e scrib e d b e lo w
System requirements (p. 187)
r
Installing the USB driver (p. 189)
r
Installing ImageMixer (p. 191)
r
Making the computer recognize the camcorder (p. 192)
r
Capturing images with ImageMixer (p. 197)
– Viewing pictures recorded on a tape (p. 197)
– Viewing pictures live from your camcorder (p. 199)
– Capturing still images (p. 199)
– Capturing moving pictures (p. 200)
183
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e i.LINK ca b le
Your computer must have an i.LINK connector and editing software installed that can
read video signals.
Refer to the operating instructions of the software for further information.
i.LINK
is marked on
DV
this side.
i.LINK cable (optional)
: Signal flow
184
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
You can also use a Memory Stick Reader/ Writer (optional).
Fo llo w t h e in st ru ct io n s in o rd e r d e scrib e d b e lo w
System requirements (p. 188)
r
Installing the USB driver (p. 189)
r
Installing Image Transfer (p. 190)
r
Making the computer recognize the camcorder (p. 192)
r
Viewing images with Image Transfer (p. 202)
Viewing images without Image Transfer (p. 203)
System requirements (p. 205)
r
Installing the USB driver (p. 206)
r
Viewing images (p. 207)
185
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB co n n e ct o r
Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for Memory
Stick.
When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended
operating environment.
When connecting w ith USB port
You cannot operate your camcorder setting the POWER switch to MEMORY.
No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r
“ Me m o ry St ick”
• “Memory Stick” operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a “Memory Stick”
formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the “Memory Stick” in
your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was
connected.
• Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Compressed files cannot be played
back on your camcorder.
So ft w a re
• Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a
still image file.
• When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to
your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image
format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open
the file.
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.
186
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to
the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not
be able to install the USB driver correctly.
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
You must install a USB driver onto your computer to connect the camcorder to the
computer’s USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,
along with the application software required for viewing images.
Syst e m re q u ire m e n t s
To view pictures recorded on a tape or live from your camcorder
OS:
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP
Home Edition or Windows XP Professional.
Standard installation is required.
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.
You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still
images.
CPU:
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)
Application:
DirectX 8.0a or later
Sound system:
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers
Memory:
64 MB or more
Hard disk:
Available memory required for installation:
at least 250 MB
Available hard disk memory recommended:
at least 1 GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)
Display:
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot high color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors),
Direct Draw display driver capability. (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this
product will not operate correctly)
Others:
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
This product is based on DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.
You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.
187
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
Syst e m re q u ire m e n t s
To view images recorded on a “Memory Stick”
OS:
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional.
Standard installation is required.
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.
CPU:
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster
Display:
Minimum 800 × 600 dot high color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors). (At 800 × 600 dot or less,
256 colors and less, the screen for installing USB driver is not displayed.)
Others:
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).
Notes
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is
used simultaneously.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all system requirements mentioned above.
188
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r
Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to your
computer.
Connect the USB cable according to “Making the computer recognize the
camcorder.”
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The
application software starts up. If the screen does not appear, double-click “My
Computer” and then “ImageMixer” (CD-ROM Drive).
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.
Click
The title screen appears.
(4) Move the cursor to “USB Driver” and click. This starts USB driver installation.
Click
(5) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.
(6) Remove the CD-ROM and then restart the computer, following the
instructions on the screen.
Note
If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver
will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again following the steps on page
194.
189
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
In st a llin g Im a g e Tra n sfe r
Image Transfer enables image data recorded on a “Memory Stick” to be automatically
transferred (copied) to your computer.
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The
application software starts up.
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.
The title screen appears.
(4) Move the cursor to “Image Transfer” and click.
Click
The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Choose Setup Language”
screen appears.
(5) Select the language for installation.
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.
190
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
In st a llin g Im a g e Mixe r
“ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” is an application that can capture or edit images, or
create video CDs.
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
The application software starts up.
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.
The title screen appears.
(4) Move the cursor to “ImageMixer” and click.
Click
The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Choose Setup Language”
screen appears.
(5) Select the language for installation.
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.
(7) If DirectX 8.0a or later version is not installed on your computer, continue
installation after installing ImageMixer.
Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX. After installation is complete,
restart your computer.
Note
The title screen is not displayed if the screen size of your computer is set to less than 800
× 600 dots and 256 colors or less. See page 187 about the System requirements.
Memory Mix Album
Once “ImageMixer” is installed, the Memory Mix album is created in “Album” of
“ImageMixer” and sample images are stored in there.
Those sample images can be transferred from the Memory Mix album to a “Memory
Stick” so that they can be used in MEMORY MIX (p. 140).
For details on the operation procedure, refer to the on-line help.
191
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r
ca m co rd e r
(1) Connect the AC Adaptor to your camcorder. Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Select USB STREAM in
to ON in the menu settings (p. 221).
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
Your computer recognizes your camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware
Wizard starts.
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts
three times because three different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow
the installation to complete without interrupting it.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
192
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
(1) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
“USB MODE” appears on the screen of your camcorder. Your computer
recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts
two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow
each installation to complete without interrupting them.
You cannot install the USB driver if a “Memory Stick” is not in your camcorder.
Be sure to insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder before installing the USB
driver.
193
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following
procedure to correctly install the USB driver.
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r
ca m co rd e r
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
2 Connect the AC Adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR.
3 Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
4 Open your computer’s “Device Manager.”
Window s XP:
Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab and click
the “Device Manager” button.
If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel,”
click “Switch to classic view” instead.
Window s 2000:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab
and click the “Device Manager” button.
Window s 98SE/Window s Me:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device
Manager.”
194
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
5 Select and delete the underlined devices.
Window s 98SE
Window s Me
Window s 2000
Window s XP
195
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
6 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then
disconnect the USB cable.
7 Restart your computer.
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM
Perform the entire procedure described in “Installing the USB driver” on page 189.
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
2 Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
3 Connect the AC Adaptor, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.
4 Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
5 Open your computer’s “Device Manager.”
Window s XP:
Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab and click
the “Device Manager” button.
If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel,”
click “Switch to classic view” instead.
Window s 2000:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab,
and click the “Device Manager” button.
Other OS:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device
Manager.”
6 Select “Other devices.”
Select the device prefixed with the “?” mark and delete.
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam
7 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then
disconnect the USB cable.
8 Restart your computer.
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM
Perform the entire procedure described in “Installing the USB driver” on page 189.
196
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r
live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r o n yo u r
co m p u t e r – USB St re a m in g
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h Im a g e Mixe r
You need to install the USB driver and ImageMixer to view images recorded on a tape
with your computer (p. 189, 191).
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor, and insert a tape into your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
Select USB STREAM in
to ON in the menu settings (p. 221).
(4) Select “Start” t “Program” t “PIXELA” t “ImageMixer” t “ImageMixer
Ver.1.5 for Sony.”
The “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” startup screen appears on your computer.
The title screen is displayed.
(5) Click
on the screen.
197
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r
o n yo u r co m p u t e r – USB St re a m in g
(6) Select
.
Monitor window
(7) Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your
camcorder using the supplied USB cable.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
198
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r
o n yo u r co m p u t e r – USB St re a m in g
(8) Press N to start playback.
You can control video operations with the buttons on the screen.
The picture appears in the monitor windows on your computer.
Monitor window
Video control
buttons
Vie w in g p ict u re s live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r
(1) Follow the steps (1), (2) on page 197.
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
Select USB STREAM in
to ON in the menu settings (p. 221).
(3) Follow the steps (4) to (7) on pages 197 and 198.
The picture from your camcorder appears in the monitor window on your
computer.
Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s
Monitor window
Thumbnail list window
(1) Select
.
(2) Looking at the monitor window, move the cursor to
point you want to capture.
and click it at the
The still image on the screen is captured.
Captured images are displayed in the thumbnail list window.
199
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r
o n yo u r co m p u t e r – USB St re a m in g
Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s
Thumbnail list window
Monitor window
Video control buttons
(1) Select
(2) Look at the monitor window and click on
you want to capture. changes to
(3) Look at the monitor window and click on
.
at the first scene of the movie
at the last scene you want to
.
capture. The captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.
To clo se “ Im a g e Mixe r”
Click
in the upper right corner of the screen.
Notes
• When you view images on your computer with the USB connection, the following
may occur. This is not a malfunction:
– The image shakes up and down.
– Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.
– Some images are displayed with the cracking noise.
– Images of different color systems to that of your camcorder are not displayed
correctly.
• When your camcorder is in the standby mode with a cassette inserted, it turns off
automatically after three minutes.
• We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your
camcorder is in the standby mode, and no cassette is inserted.
• Indicators on the screen do not appear on images that are captured into your
computer.
• You cannot carry out any “Memory Stick” operations during the USB Streaming.
200
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r
o n yo u r co m p u t e r – USB St re a m in g
If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Reinstall the USB driver
following the procedure on page 194.
If any trouble occurs
Close all running applications, then restart your computer.
Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:
– Disconnect the USB cable.
– Set the POWER switch to another position or OFF (CHG) on your camcorder.
Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f Im a g e Mixe r
A “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” on-line help site is available where you can find
detailed operating information.
(1) Click the
button located in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The ImageMixer’s Manual screen appears.
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.
To exit on-line help
Click the
button in the top right corner of the screen.
If you have any questions about ImageMixer
“ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” is the product of PIXELA corporation. For more
information, refer to the instruction manual of the CD-ROM supplied with your
camcorder.
201
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h Im a g e Tra n sfe r
The image data recorded on a “Memory Stick” is automatically transferred (copied) to
your computer with Image Transfer. You can also view images with ImageMixer.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, and connect the AC Adaptor to
your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
(5) Image Transfer automatically starts up and the transfer of image data begins.
(6) ImageMixer automatically starts up, enabling you to view the copied image.
Import button
(7) Select an album and the image, then press the import button.
The image is added in your album, and you can edit the image.
202
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h o u t Im a g e Tra n sfe r
Before operation
An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving
pictures in Windows environment.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, and connect the AC Adaptor to
your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
“USB MODE” appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
(5) Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly recognized
drive (e.g. “Removable Disk (F:)”).
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.
(6) Double-click the desired image file from the folder in this order.
1)
2)
“Dcim” folder t “sssmsdcf” folder * t Image file *
For the detailed folder and file name, see “Image file storage destinations and
image files” (p. 204).
1)
* sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.
2)
*
Copying a moving picture file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is
recommended. If you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image
and sound may break off.
203
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s
Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders described below.
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within
the range from 0001 to 9999.
Exa m p le : Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs
(Th e d rive re co g n izin g yo u r ca m co rd e r is [F:].)
Folder containing image files recorded using
other camcorders w ithout the folder creation
function (for playback only)
Folder containing image files recorded w ith your
camcorder
When no new folders have been created, this is
only “101MSDCF”
Folder containing moving picture data recorded
using other camcorders w ithout the folder
creation function (for playback only)
Folder
101MSDCF
(up to 999MSDCF)
File
Meaning
Still image file
Moving picture file
DSC0ssss.JPG
MOV0ssss.MPG
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d re m o ve t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)
For Window s 2000, Window s Me, Window s XP users
(1) Move the cursor to the
“Unplug or Eject Hardware” on the Task Tray and
click to cancel the applicable drive.
(2) After the “Safe to remove” message appears, disconnect the USB cable and
eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
204
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to
the computer’s USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,
along with the application software required for viewing images.
Syst e m re q u ire m e n t s
OS:
Mac OS 8.5.1/ 8.6/ 9.0/ 9.1/ 9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1)
Standard installation is required.
However, note that upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/ 9.1 should be used for the following
models:
– iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive
– iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation
Others:
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed to play back moving pictures.
Notes
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is
used simultaneously.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments
mentioned above.
205
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)
The USB driver does not have to be installed. Your camcorder is automatically
recognized as a drive just by connecting it to your Mac using the USB cable.
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users
Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB
driver is completed.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
The application software screen appears.
(3) Select “Handycam” on the screen.
The title screen appears.
(4) Click “USB Driver” to open the folder containing the six files related to
“Driver.”
Click
(5) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.
• Sony Camcorder USB Driver
• Sony Camcorder USB Shim
(6) When the message appears, click “OK.”
The USB driver is installed on your computer.
(7) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.
(8) Restart your computer.
206
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
Vie w in g im a g e s
Before operation
• You need to install the USB driver to view a “Memory Stick” images on your
computer (p. 206).
• QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed to play back moving pictures.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Mac OS to load.
(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, and connect the AC Adaptor to
your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB jack on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
“USB MODE” appears on the screen of your camcorder.
(5) Double-click the “Memory Stick” icon on the desktop.
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.
(6) Double-click the desired image file from the folder in this order.
1)
2)
“Dcim” folder t “sssmsdcf” folder * t Image file *
1)
2)
* sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.
*
Copying a moving picture file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is
recommended. If you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image
and sound may break off.
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d re m o ve t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)
(1) Close all running applications.
Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.
(2) Drag the “Memory Stick” icon into the “Trash.” Alternatively, select the
“Memory Stick” icon by clicking it, and then select “Eject disk” from the
“Special” menu at the top left of the screen.
(3) Unplug the USB cable or eject the “Memory Stick.” Set the POWER switch of
your camcorder to OFF (CHG).
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users
Shut down your computer, then unplug the USB cable, eject the “Memory Stick” or set
the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
207
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it
o n yo u r co m p u t e r – Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n
You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit on your computer which
has the i.LINK connector by transmitting data via your camcorder.
Before operation
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set A/ V t DV OUT in
to ON (p. 214).
(4) Start playback on the analog video unit.
(5) Start procedures for capturing images and sound on your computer.
The operation procedures depend on your computer and the software you are
using.
For details on how to capture images, refer to the operating instructions of
your computer and the software you are using.
S VIDEO
AUDIO/VIDEO
VCR
i.LINK
OUT
DV
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Yellow
i.LINK cable
(optional)
AUDIO
A/ V connecting
cable (supplied)
White
Red
is marked on
this side.
: Signal flow
Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d
Stop capturing procedures on your computer, and stop playback on the analog video
unit.
208
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n
Notes
• You need the software and computer that support the exchange of digital video
signals.
• Depending on the state of the analog video signals, your computer may not be able to
output images correctly when you convert analog video signals into digital video
signals via your camcorder.
• You cannot record or capture video output via your camcorder when the video tapes
include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.
If your computer has a USB jack
You can connect your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable supplied with
your camcorder. Note, however, that the image may flicker.
If your VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
VCR.
209
— Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon,
then the menu item and then the mode.
(1) In CAMERA, VCR/ PLAYER or MEMORY mode, press MENU to display the
menu settings.*
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to
set.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to
set.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, and press the dial
to set.
(5) If you want to change other items, select
RETURN and press the dial, then
repeat steps from (2) to (4).
For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 211).
CAMERA
1
MANUAL SET
PROGRAM AE
EFFECT
EFFECT
P
D
FLASH MODE
AUTO SHTR
2
3
4
MENU
[
]
MENU : END
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC
INT. REC
TAPE SET
REC MODE SP
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC
INT. REC
RETURN
VCR/PLAYER*
MANUAL SET
P
D
EFFECT
EFFECT
1
[
]
[
]
MENU : END
MENU : END
[
]
MENU : END
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC ON
INT. REC
RETURN
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC
INT. REC
RETURN
MEMORY
*
AUTO
AUTO
MANUAL SET
PROGRAM AE
FLASH MODE
AUTO SHTR
1
2
[
]
[
]
MENU : END
MENU : END
[
]
MENU : END
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
FRAME REC ON
INT. REC
RETURN
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
AUTO
ON
FRAME REC
INT. REC
RETURN
[
]
[
]
MENU : END
MENU : END
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
210
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
To m a ke t h e m e n u d isp la y d isa p p e a r
Press MENU.
Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:
MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
VCR SET
PLAYER SET
LCD SET
MEM SET 1
1
MEM SET 2
2
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS
Depending on your camcorder model
The menu display may be different from that in this illustration.
Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m z is the default setting.
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.
The screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment.
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Mode
Meaning
Icon/item
MANUAL SET
—
—
To suit your specific shooting requirement
(p. 68).
CAMERA
MEMORY
PROGRAM AE
To add special effects, like those in films or on
TV, to images (p. 64).
CAMERA
P EFFECT
(in recording)
—
To add special effects, like those in films or on
TV, to images (p. 83).
VCR
P EFFECT
(in playback) *
2)
3)
—
To add special effects using the various digital
functions (p. 65, 85).
VCR
CAMERA
D EFFECT *
3)
z ON
To fire the flash (optional) regardless of the
brightness of the surroundings.
CAMERA
MEMORY
FLASH MODE *
AUTO
To fire the flash automatically.
2)
z ON
To automatically activate the electronic shutter
when shooting in bright conditions.
CAMERA
MEMORY
AUTO SHTR *
OFF
To not automatically activate the electronic
shutter even when shooting in bright conditions.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
(continued on the following page)
211
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
3)
Notes on FLASH MODE *
• You cannot adjust FLASH MODE if the external flash (optional) is not compatible
with the FLASH MODE.
• You cannot adjust FLASH MODE if the external flash (optional) is not connected.
2)
Note on AUTO SHTR *
The Auto Shutter function electronically adjusts the shutter speed.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
CAMERA SET
Mode
Meaning
2)
SELFTIMER *
z OFF
To not use the self-timer function.
CAMERA
MEMORY
ON
To use the self-timer function (p. 41, 55, 135,
149).
3)
D ZOOM
*
z OFF
40×
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 20× zoom
CAMERA
is performed.
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to
40× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).
560×
z OFF
40×
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to
560× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).
4)
*
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 20× zoom
is performed.
CAMERA
MEMORY
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to
40× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).
700×
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to
700× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).
5)
16:9WIDE
*
z OFF
ON
—
CAMERA
CAMERA
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 58).
—
6)
*
z OFF
CINEMA
16:9FULL
To record in the CINEMA mode (p. 59).
To record in the 16:9FULL mode.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
6)
*
7)
*
212
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
CAMERA SET
Mode
Meaning
7)
STEADYSHOT * z ON
To compensate for camera-shake.
CAMERA
MEMORY
OFF
To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural
pictures are produced when shooting a
stationary subject with a tripod.
N.S.LIGHT
z ON
To use the NightShot Light function (p. 39).
To cancel the NightShot Light function.
CAMERA
MEMORY
OFF
7)
Notes on the SteadyShot function *
• The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
• Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot function.
7)
If you cancel the SteadyShot function *
The SteadyShot off indicator
appears on the screen. Your camcorder prevents
excessive compensation for camera-shake.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
6)
*
7)
*
213
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
VCR SET
PLAYER SET
Mode
Meaning
2)
z STEREO
HiFi SOUND *
To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track
tape with main and sub sound (p. 238).
VCR
1
2
To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or
a dual sound track tape with main sound.
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound
or a dual sound track tape with sub sound.
3)
z OFF
ON
EDIT *
—
PLAYER
To minimize picture deterioration when editing.
To correct jitter.
4) 5)
z ON
OFF
TBC * *
VCR/
PLAYER
To not correct jitter. Set TBC to OFF when
playing back a tape on which you have dubbed
over and recorded the signal of a TV game or
similar machine.
TBC stands for “Time Base Corrector.”
4) 5)
z ON
DNR * *
To reduce picture noise.
VCR/
PLAYER
OFF
To reduce a conspicuous afterimage when the
picture has a lot of movement.
DNR stands for “Digital Noise Reduction.”
2)
—
AUDIO MIX *
To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and
stereo 2.
VCR
VCR
ST1
ST2
z OFF
A/V t
To output digital images and sound in analog
format using your camcorder.
6)
DV OUT *
ON
To output analog images and sound in digital
format using your camcorder (p. 208).
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
* When you play back tapes recorded in the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system only
6)
*
214
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
VCR SET
Mode
Meaning
PLAYER SET
6)
To automatically select the system (Hi8
/
z AUTO
PB MODE *
VCR
standard 8 mm or Digital8 ) that was used
to record on the tape, and play back the tape.
To play back a tape that was recorded in the
/
Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system when your
camcorder does not automatically distinguish
the recording system.
After five minutes of removing the pow er source
2)
3)
2)
The HiFi SOUND * , EDIT * and AUDIO MIX * items are returned to their default
settings.
2)
Notes on AUDIO MIX *
• You can adjust the balance only for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system.
• When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance.
6)
Note on PB MODE *
The mode will return to the default setting when:
– you remove the power source.
– you turn the POWER switch.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
* When you play back tapes recorded in the Hi8
/ standard 8 mm system only
6)
*
215
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
Icon/item
LCD SET
Mode
Meaning
sw itch *
LCD BRIGHT
—
To adjust the brightness on the LCD screen with VCR/
the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
To darken
To lighten
LCD B.L.
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness of the LCD screen
VCR/
backlight to normal.
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
BRIGHT
—
To brighten the LCD screen backlight.
LCD COLOR
To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turning
the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the
following bar.
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
To get low-
intensity
To get high-
intensity
Notes on LCD B.L.
• When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during
recording.
• When you use power sources other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically
selected.
Even if you adjust LCD BRIGHT, LCD B.L., LCD COLOR
The recorded picture will not be affected.
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
216
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
MEM SET 1
Mode
Meaning
1
STILL SET
QUALITY
z FINE
To record still images in fine image quality
mode (p. 128).
VCR
MEMORY
STANDARD
To record still images in standard image quality
mode.
FLD/FRAME z FIELD
To record moving subjects correcting jitter
(p. 132).
MEMORY
FRAME
To record stationary subjects in high quality.
MOVIE SET
IMAGESIZE
z 320 × 240
To record moving pictures in 320 × 240 size
(p. 130).
VCR
MEMORY
160 × 112
To record moving pictures in 160 × 112 size.
REMAIN
z AUTO
To display the remaining capacity of the
“Memory Stick” in the following cases:
• For five seconds after you set the POWER
switch to VCR or MEMORY.
VCR
MEMORY
• For five seconds after inserting a “Memory
Stick” into your camcorder.
• When the capacity of the “Memory Stick” is
less than a few minutes in MEMORY mode.
• For five seconds after you start recording a
moving picture.
• For five seconds after you stop recording a
moving picture.
ON
To always display the remaining capacity of the
“Memory Stick.”
NEW FOLDER
z ADD
RETURN
—
To create a new folder (p. 160).
To cancel creating a new folder.
MEMORY
REC FOLDER
FILE NO.
To select a folder in which images are recorded
(p. 162).
MEMORY
VCR
z SERIES
To assign numbers to files in sequence even if
the “Memory Stick” is changed. However, when MEMORY
a new folder is created or the recording folder is
changed, the file number sequence is reset.
RESET
ON
To reset the file numbering each time the
“Memory Stick” is changed.
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
To write a print mark on recorded still images
you want to print out later (p. 180).
VCR
MEMORY
z OFF
To cancel print marks on still images.
ON
To protect selected images against accidental
erasure (p. 176).
VCR
MEMORY
z OFF
To not protect images.
PB FOLDER
—
To select a folder that contains images to be
played back (p. 169).
MEMORY
217
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
MEM SET 2
Mode
Meaning
2
SLIDE SHOW
INT.R -STL
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
z ALL FILES
To cancel the slide show.
MEMORY
To play back all images in the “Memory Stick”
continuously (p. 174).
1)
FOLDER sss * To play back all images in the current PB folder
continuously.
ON
To activate the interval photo recording function MEMORY
(p. 154).
z OFF
To deactivate the interval photo recording
function.
SET
To set INTERVAL for interval photo recording.
z RETURN
ALL FILES
To cancel deleting all images.
MEMORY
MEMORY
To delete all unprotected images in the
“Memory Stick” (p. 178).
1)
FOLDER sss * To delete all unprotected images in the current
PB folder.
z RETURN
To cancel formatting.
OK
To format an inserted “Memory Stick.”
Formatting erases all information on a
“Memory Stick.”
1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC
dial, then press the dial.
2. Select OK with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial,
then press the dial.
3. After EXECUTE appears, press the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. The FORMATTING
indicator flashes during formatting. The
COMPLETE indicator appears when
formatting is finished.
Notes on formatting
• Formatting erases all folders.
• Formatting erases all images even if they are protected.
• The supplied “Memory Stick” has been formatted at factory. Formatting the “Memory
2)
Stick” on your camcorder is not required.*
• Do not do any of the following while the FORMATTING indicator is displayed:
– Switch the POWER switch
– Operate buttons
– Eject the “Memory Stick”
– Remove the power source
• You cannot format the “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick”
is set to LOCK.
• Format the “Memory Stick” when “
FORMAT ERROR” is displayed.
1)
* sss stands for the folder number.
2)
*
218
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
TAPE SET
REC MODE
Mode
Meaning
z SP
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.
VCR
CAMERA
2)
3)
LP
To increase the recording time to 1.5 * / 2 *
times the SP mode.
2)
4)
AUDIO MODE * z 12BIT
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo
sounds).
VCR *
CAMERA
16BIT
To record in the 16-bit mode (one stereo sound
with high quality).
3)
ORC TO SET *
—
To automatically adjust the recording condition
to get the best possible recording. Press START/
STOP to start adjustment. Your camcorder takes
about 10 seconds to check the tape condition
and then returns to the standby mode.
CAMERA
ORC stands for “Optimizing the Recording Condition.”
q REMAIN
z AUTO
To display the remaining tape bar:
• For about eight seconds after your camcorder
is turned on and calculates the remaining
amount of tape.
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
• For about eight seconds after a cassette is
inserted and your camcorder calculates the
remaining amount of tape.
• For about eight seconds after N is pressed in
VCR/ PLAYER mode.
• For about eight seconds after DISPLAY is
pressed to display the screen indicators.
• For the period of tape rewinding, forwarding
or picture search in VCR/ PLAYER mode.
ON
z OFF
ON
To always display the remaining tape bar.
To deactivate the frame recording.
2)
FRAME REC *
CAMERA
CAMERA
To activate the frame recording (p. 74).
2)
INT. REC *
ON
To activate the interval recording function
(p. 72).
z OFF
To deactivate the interval recording function.
SET
To set INTERVAL and REC TIME for interval
recording.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
(continued on the following page)
219
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
Notes on the LP mode
• When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing
back the tape on your camcorder. When you playback the tape recorded on another
camcorder or VCR, noise may occur in images or sounds.
• When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony cassette so that you
can get the most out of your camcorder.
• When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in
the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be
2)
written properly between scenes.*
• Noise may occur also when you play back on your camcorder tapes recorded in the
3)
LP mode on another camcorder or VCR.*
• When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, recording is carried out in
3)
the standard 8 mm system.*
2)
Note on AUDIO MODE *
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in
AUDIO MIX.
4)
Note on dubbing a tape to another VCR *
You cannot select AUDIO MODE for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system. You,
however, can select AUDIO MODE when you dub tapes recorded in the Hi8
standard 8 mm system to another VCR using the i.LINK cable.
/
3)
Notes on ORC setting *
• Each time you eject the cassette, the ORC setting will be canceled. If necessary, set the
setting.
• You cannot use this setting on a tape with the red mark on the cassette exposed.
(i. e. the tape is write-protected)
• When you set ORC TO SET, a non-recorded section of about 0.1 seconds appears on
the tape. However, note that this non-recorded section disappears from the tape when
you continue recording from this section.
• To check if you have already set the ORC setting, select ORC TO SET in the menu
settings. “ORC ON” is displayed if ORC TO SET is already set.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
220
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
Mode
Meaning
—
z ON
OFF
To set the date or time (p. 26).
CAMERA
MEMORY
2)
AUTO DATE *
To record the date for 10 seconds after recording CAMERA
has started.
To cancel the auto date function.
3)
USB STREAM * z OFF
To deactivate the USB Streaming function.
To activate the USB Streaming function.
To display selected menu items in normal size.
VCR
CAMERA
ON
LTR SIZE
z NORMAL
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
2×
To display selected menu items at twice the
normal size.
LANGUAGE
z ENGLISH
To display the information indicators in English. VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
FRANÇAIS
To display the some of the information
indicators in French.
ESPAÑOL
To display the some of the information
indicators in Spanish.
PORTUGUÊS To display the some of the information
indicators in Portuguese.
To display the some of the information
indicators in Chinese.
To display the some of the information
indicators in Korean.
DEMO MODE
z ON
OFF
To make the demonstration appear.
To cancel the demonstration mode.
CAMERA
Notes on DEMO MODE
• You cannot select DEMO MODE when a “Memory Stick” is inserted in your
4)
camcorder.*
• You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.
• The DEMO MODE default setting is STBY (Standby), and the demonstration starts
about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a
cassette inserted.
4)
To cancel the demonstration, insert a “Memory Stick”* or a cassette, set the POWER
switch to anything other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY
(Standby) again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu settings, turn the
POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and return the POWER switch to CAMERA.
• When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, “NIGHTSHOT” appears on the screen and you
cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
221
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
OTHERS
Mode
Meaning
2)
DATA CODE *
z DATE/ CAM
To display date, time and recording data during VCR
playback.
MEMORY
DATE
To display date and time during playback.
WORLD TIME
—
To set the clock to the local time.
CAMERA
MEMORY
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set a time
difference. The clock changes by the time
difference you set here. If you set the time
difference to 0, the clock returns to the originally
set time.
BEEP
z MELODY
To output the melody when you start/ stop
recording or when an unusual condition occurs
on your camcorder.
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
NORMAL
OFF
To output the beep instead of the melody.
To cancel all sound including shutter sound.
3)
COMMANDER
*
z ON
To activate the Remote Commander supplied
with your camcorder.
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
OFF
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid
erroneous remote control operation caused by
other VCR’s remote control.
DISPLAY
z LCD
V-OUT/ LCD
z ON
To show the display on the LCD screen and in
the viewfinder.
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
To show the display on the TV screen, LCD
screen and in the viewfinder.
REC LAMP
To light up the camera recording lamp at the
front of your camcorder.
CAMERA
MEMORY
OFF
To turn the camera recording lamp off so that
the person is not aware of the recording.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
222
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s
POWER
sw itch *
1)
Icon/item
OTHERS
VIDEO EDIT
Mode
Meaning
4)
*
z RETURN
To cancel video editing.
VCR
TAPE
To make a program and perform video editing
(p. 106).
MEMORY
To make a program and perform MPEG editing
(p. 156).
5)
*
—
To make a program and perform video editing
(p. 106).
VCR
4)
Note *
If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings, the
picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the screen even when your camcorder is
connected to outputs on the TV or VCR. (Except when your camcorder is connected
with the i.LINK cable)
3)
After five minutes of removing the pow er source *
The COMMANDER item returns to their default settings.
When recording a close subject
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend that you
set REC LAMP to OFF.
1)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
223
— Tro u b le sh o o t in g —
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct
t ro u b le
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to
troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If “C:ss:ss”
appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 232.
In t h e re co rd in g m o d e
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Action
START/ STOP does not operate.
• The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.
c Set it to CAMERA (p. 30).
• The tape has run out.
c Rewind the cassette or insert a new one (p. 28, 45).
• The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.
c Use a new tape or slide the tab (p. 29).
• The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).
The power goes off.
• While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder
has been in the standby mode for more than three
1)
2)
minutes * / five minutes * .
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to
CAMERA again (p. 30).
• The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).
The image on the viewfinder screen
is not clear.
• The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.
c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 35).
The SteadyShot function does not
work.*
• STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.
3)
c Set it to ON (p. 213).
1)
• 16:9WIDE is set to ON in the menu settings.*
c Set it to OFF (p. 212).
• 16:9WIDE is set to 16:9FULL.*
2)
c Set it to OFF (p. 212).
The autofocusing function does not
work.
• The setting is the manual focus mode.
c Set the autofocus mode (p. 71).
• Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.
c Adjust to focus manually (p. 71).
The x indicator flashes in the
• The video heads may be dirty.
viewfinder.
c Clean the heads using the Sony V8-25CLD cleaning
cassette (optional) (p. 248).
1)
*
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
224
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Action
The picture does not appear in the
viewfinder.
• The LCD panel is open.
c Close the LCD panel when you do not record using the
LCD screen (p. 32).
A vertical band appears when you
shoot a subject such as lights or a
candle flame against a dark
background.
• The contrast between the subject and background is too
high. This is not a malfunction.
A vertical band appears when you
shoot a very bright subject.
• The smear phenomenon is occurring. This is not a
malfunction.
Some tiny white, red, blue or green
spots appear on the screen.*
• Slow shutter, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter
mode is activated. This is not a malfunction.
4)
An unknown picture is displayed on
the screen.
• If 10 minutes passes after you set the POWER switch to
CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu
settings without a “Memory Stick” *4) or a cassette
inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the
demonstration.
c Insert a “Memory Stick” *4) or a cassette and the
demonstration stops.
You can also cancel DEMO MODE (p. 221).
The picture is recorded in incorrect or • NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.
unnatural colors.
c Set it to OFF (p. 39).
Picture appears too bright, and the
subject does not appear on the
screen.
• NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place.
c Set it to OFF (p. 39).
• The backlight function is active.
c Deactivate the backlight function (p. 38).
4)
The shutter does not sound.*
• BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 222).
A horizontal black band appears
when shooting a TV screen or a
computer screen.*
• Set STEADYSHOT to OFF in the menu settings (p. 213).
3)
An external flash (optional) does not
work.*
• The power of the external flash is off or the power source
is not installed.
4)
c Turn on the external flash or install the power source.
• AUTO is selected in FLASH MODE in the menu settings
while recording in a bright place.
c Set it to ON (p. 211).
1)
*
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
225
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
In t h e p la yb a ck m o d e
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Action
The picture does not appear on the
screen when playing back a tape.*
• The tape is recorded in the Hi8
system.
/ Standard 8 mm
1)
The tape does not move when a
video control button is pressed.
• The POWER switch is set to MEMORY, CAMERA or OFF
(CHG).*2)
c Set it to VCR/ PLAYER *2) (p. 45).
The playback button does not work.
• The cassette has run out of tape.
c Rewind the tape (p. 45).
There are horizontal lines on the
picture.
• The television’s video channel is not adjusted correctly.
c Adjust it *3) (p. 51).
The playback picture is not clear or
does not appear.
• EDIT is set to ON in the menu settings.
c Set it to OFF *3) (p. 214).
• The video head may be dirty.
c Clean the heads using the Sony V8-25CLD cleaning
cassette (optional) (p. 248).
No sound or only a low sound is
heard when playing back a tape.
• The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2
in the menu settings.*
4)
c Set it to STEREO (p. 214).
• The volume is turned to minimum.
c Press VOLUME + (p. 45).
4)
• AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings.*
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 214).
The date search does not work
correctly.*
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
(p. 90).
5)
The picture which is recorded in the
• PB MODE is set to
c Set it to AUTO (p. 215).
c Set PB MODE to
/
in the menu settings.
6)
Digital8
The tape which is recorded in the
Hi8 / standard 8 mm system
is not played back correctly.*
system is not played back.*
/
in the menu settings (p. 215).
6)
4)
“PAL” is displayed on the screen.*
• The TV color system recorded on the tape is different from
that of your camcorder.
1)
*
2)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
6)
*
226
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
In t h e re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck m o d e s
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Action
Your camcorder does not function
even when the POWER switch is set
to a position other than OFF (CHG).
• The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).
• The AC Adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.
c Connect the AC Adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 24).
The end search function does not
work.
• The tape was ejected after recording.
• You have not recorded on the new cassette yet.
The end search function does not
work correctly.
• The tape has a blank portion at the beginning or midway.
The battery pack is quickly
discharged.
• The operating temperature is too low.
• The battery pack is not charged enough.
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 19).
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be
recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 18).
The remaining battery time indicator • You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or
does not indicate the correct time.
cold environment for a long time.
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be
recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 18).
• The battery is dead.
c Use a fully charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.
c Charge the battery pack fully so that the remaining
battery time indicator indicates correct time (p. 19).
The power goes off although the
remaining battery time indicator
indicates that the battery pack has
enough power to operate.
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.
c Charge the battery pack fully so that the remaining
battery time indicator indicates correct time (p. 19).
The cassette cannot be removed from • The power source is disconnected.
the holder.
c Connect it firmly (p. 18, 24).
• The battery is dead.
c Use a charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).
The % and Z indicators flash and no
functions except for cassette ejection
work.
• Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).
The remaining tape indicator is not
displayed.
• The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape
indicator.
227
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Action
• The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY.
c Set it to MEMORY (p. 132).
The “Memory Stick” does not
function.
• The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.
c Insert a “Memory Stick” (p. 127).
• The “Memory Stick” is full.
Recording does not function.
c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 177).
• The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted.
c Format the “Memory Stick” on your camcorder or use
another “Memory Stick” (p. 127, 218).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 240).
• The image is protected.
An image cannot be deleted.
c Cancel image protection (p. 176).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 240).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
You cannot format a “Memory
LOCK.
Stick.”
c Release the lock (p. 240).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
Deleting all the images cannot be
carried out.
c Release the lock (p. 240).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
You cannot protect an image.
c Release the lock (p. 240).
• The image to protect is not played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image (p. 163).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
You cannot write a print mark on a
still image.
c Release the lock (p. 240).
• The image to write a print mark to is not played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image (p. 163).
• You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.
c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture.
• You may not be able to play back images in actual size
when you try to play back images recorded by other
equipment. This is not a malfunction.
You cannot play back images in
actual size.
• Folders/ files renamed or images processed with your
computer may not be played back. (The file name will
blink.)
You cannot play back image data.
• If you record images with any other equipment, the
images may not play back normally on your camcorder.
228
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Ot h e rs
Symptom
Easy Dubbing does not function.*
Cause and/or Corrective Action
1)
• Your VCR and/ or video camera recorder is not set
correctly.
c Make sure the input selector of the VCR is set to LINE.
Also, make sure the power switch of the video camera is
set to VTR/ VCR (p. 99).
• The IR SETUP code or PAUSE MODE is not set correctly.
c Select the correct IR SETUP code and PAUSE MODE,
according to your VCR. Then confirm VCR operation
with the IR TEST function (p. 99).
Digital program editing to a tape
does not function.*
• The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.
c Check the connection and set the input selector on the
VCR again (p. 107).
2)
• Your camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other
than Sony using the i.LINK cable.
c Set it to IR (p. 107).
• You have attempted to set a program on a blank portion of
the tape.
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 115).
• Your camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.
c Adjust the synchronization (p. 113).
• The IR SETUP code is incorrect.
c Set the correct code (p. 101).
3)
• PB MODE is set to
/
in the menu settings.*
c Set it to AUTO (p. 215).
Digital program editing to a
“Memory Stick” does not function.*
• Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is
attempted.
3)
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 156).
The Remote Commander supplied
with your camcorder does not
work.*
• COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON (p. 222).
• Something is blocking the infrared rays.
4)
c Remove the obstacle.
• The batteries are inserted with + and – incorrectly
matching + and – inside the battery compartment.
c Insert the batteries correctly (p. 264).
• The batteries are dead.
c Insert new ones (p. 264).
1)
*
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
(continued on the following page)
229
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Action
• DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings.
c Set it to LCD (p. 222).
The picture from a TV or VCR does
not appear on the screen even when
your camcorder is connected to the
outputs of other equipment
3)
(connected with the A/ V cable).*
• Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).
The melody or beep sounds for five
seconds.
• Some trouble has occurred in your camcorder.
c Eject the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
camcorder.
• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).
You cannot charge the battery pack.
c Set it to OFF (CHG).
• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).
c Set it to OFF (CHG).
The BATTERY INFO is not
displayed.
• The battery pack is not installed properly.
c Install it properly (p. 18).
• The battery pack is fully discharged.
c Install a fully charged battery pack.
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC Adaptor or
remove the battery, then reconnect it in about one
minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not
work, open the LCD panel and press the RESET button
using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET
button, all the settings including the date and time
return to their defaults.) (p. 258)
No function works though the power
is on.
5)
• Your camcorder was connected to your computer with the
USB cable before installing the USB driver, so the driver
was not recognized by the computer.
You cannot install the USB driver.*
c Uninstall the unrecognized driver, and then reinstall the
driver (p. 194).
1)
*
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
230
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Action
5)
USB Streaming does not work.*
• The USB driver is not installed correctly.
c Uninstall the unrecognized driver, and then reinstall the
driver (p. 194).
• Your computer’s operating system is Windows 98 or
earlier.
• USB STREAM is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON.
• USB Streaming does not work when:
– you record MPEG movie on a “Memory Stick.”*
– you record a photo on a “Memory Stick.”*
3)
3)
Image data cannot be transferred by
the USB connection.*
• The USB cable was connected before installation of the
USB driver was completed.
5)
c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and reinstall the USB
driver (p. 194).
The cassette cannot be removed even • Moisture has started to condense in your camcorder
if the cassette lid is open.
(p. 247).
1)
*
2)
*
3)
*
4)
*
5)
*
231
Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display
function.
LCD scre e n o r vie w fin d e r
C:21:00
This function displays the current state of your
camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a
letter and numbers) on the screen.
If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following
list of codes. The last two digits (indicated by ss)
differ depending on the state of your camcorder.
Self-diagnosis display
• C:ss:ss
You can service your camcorder
yourself.
• E:ss:ss
Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
5-digit display
Cause and/or Corrective Action
• You are using a battery pack that is not an
C:04:ss
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 21, 242).
C:21:ss
• Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).
C:22:ss
• The video heads are dirty.
c Clean the heads using the Sony V8-25CLD cleaning
cassette (optional) (p. 248).
C:31:ss
• A malfunction other than the above that you can service
has occurred.
c Eject the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
camcorder.
C:32:ss
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC Adaptor or
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power
source, operate your camcorder.
E:20:ss
E:61:ss
E:62:ss
• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code.
(e.g. E:61:10)
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions several times,
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
232
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s
If indicators and messages appear on the screen, check the following.
See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information.
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs
101–0001
C:21:00
Tape/Battery pack w arning indicator
Slow flashing:
• The battery pack is nearly dead.
• The tape is near the end.
Fast flashing:
• The battery pack is dead.
• The tape has run out.*
101-0001 Warning indicator as to file
% Moisture condensation has occurred *
Fast flashing:
• Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,
and leave it for about one hour with the
cassette compartment open (p. 247).
Slow flashing:
• The file is corrupted.
• The file is unreadable.
• You are trying to use the MEMORY MIX
function on a moving picture (p. 140).
Q Warning indicator as to tape
Slow flashing:
• The remaining tape becomes shorter than
the length for five-minute recording.
• No tape is inserted.*
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is set
to LOCK (red) * (p. 29).
C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 232)
E Warning indicator as to battery
Slow flashing:
• The battery is nearly dead.
The E indicator sometimes flashes even if
the remaining battery time is about five to
10 minutes depending on the operating
conditions, environment and battery
condition.
Fast flashing:
• The cassette has run out of tape.*
Warning indicator as to incompatible
“Memory Stick”*
Fast flashing:
Slow flashing:
• An incompatible “Memory Stick” is
inserted.
• The battery pack is dead.
• The battery pack is completely dead, and
cannot be charged.
* You hear the melody or beep.
233
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s
Z You need to eject the cassette *
Slow flashing:
- The image is protected *
Slow flashing:
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is set
to LOCK (red) (p. 29).
• The image is protected (p. 176).
Warning indicator as to the flash
(optional)
Fast flashing:
Fast flashing:
• Moisture condensation has occurred
(p. 247).
• There is something wrong with the external
flash. (optional)
• The cassette has run out of tape.
• The self-diagnosis display function is
activated (p. 232).
Warning indicator as to still image
recording
Slow flashing:
Warning indicator as to “Memory
Stick”
• The still image cannot be recorded on the
Slow flashing:
“Memory Stick”
• The still image cannot be recorded on the
tepe (p. 56).
(p. 53).
• No “Memory Stick” is inserted.
Fast flashing *:
• The “Memory Stick” is not readable on
your camcorder (p. 126).
• The image cannot be recorded on a
“Memory Stick.”
* You hear the melody or beep.
Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”
formatting *
Fast flashing:
• “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 240).
• “Memory Stick” is not formatted correctly
(p. 218).
234
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s
• CLOCK SET
Set the date and time (p. 26).
• FOR “InfoLITHIUM”
Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 242).
BATTERY ONLY
• Q Z TAPE END
The cassette has run out of tape.*
Insert a cassette tape.*
• Q NO TAPE
•
CLEANING CASSETTE
The video heads are dirty. (The x indicator and
“
CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one
after another on the screen.)* (p. 248)
• COPY INHIBIT
• START/ STOP KEY
• ORC
You tried to record a picture that has a copyright
control signal * (p. 238).
Press START/ STOP to activate the ORC setting. This
message is displayed in white (p. 219).
ORC is working. This message is displayed in white
(p. 219).
•
NOW CHARGING
Charging an external flash (optional) does not work
correctly.*
* You hear the melody or beep.
235
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s a s t o “ Me m o ry St ick”
You hear the melody or beep.
•
•
FULL
The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 131).
FOLDER NO. FULL
Folders have already been created in the “Memory
Stick” up to the limit (up to the folder 999 MSDCF)
(p. 161).
•
-
The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK (p. 240).
•
•
•
NO FILE
No still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick.”
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.
NO MEMORY STICK
AUDIO ERROR
You are trying to record an image with sound that
cannot be recorded by your camcorder on “Memory
Stick” (p. 151).
•
•
MEMORY STICK ERROR
FORMAT ERROR
The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 127).
Check the type of the “Memory Stick” format
(p. 218).
•
PLAY ERROR
REC ERROR
The image cannot be played back.
Reinsert the “Memory Stick,” then play back the
image again.
•
•
Check the input signal before retrying recording
(p. 139, 153).
INCOMPATIBLE
MEMORY STICK
The “Memory Stick” inserted is not compatible with
your camcorder.
• DELETING
You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images
on “Memory Stick.”
• FORMATTING
• NO FILE AVAILABLE
You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a
“Memory Stick.”
No file is in the current PB folder (p. 169).
• USB STREAMING ON GOING You cannot carry out any “Memory Stick” operations
during USB Streaming (p. 200).
• READ-ONLY MEMORY
STICK
The 100MSDCF is only for playback (p. 162).
236
— Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —
Ab o u t vid e o ca sse t t e
Usa b le ca sse t t e t a p e s a n d Re co rd in g / Pla yb a ck syst e m s
1)
Usable cassette tapes
Recording system
Hi8
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm
*
Digital8
Digital8
2)
Playback system *
Hi8
Standard 8 mm
1)
Usable cassette tapes
Recording system
Playback system
Hi8
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm
*
Digital8
Digital8
Usable cassette tapes
Recording system
Hi8
Hi8
Hi8
Standard 8 mm
Standard 8 mm
Standard 8 mm
3)
*
2)
Playback system *
1)
* If you use standard 8 mm tape, be sure to play back the tape on your camcorder.
Mosaic noise may appear when you play back standard 8 mm tape on other VCRs
(including another DCR-TRV150/ TRV250/ TRV350/ TRV351).
2)
* When you play back a tape, the Hi8
system or standard 8 mm system is
automatically detected and the playback system automatically switches to.
3)
* If you record on a Hi8
video cassette in the LP mode, recording is carried out in
the standard 8 mm system.
Wh a t is t h e “ Dig it a l8
This video system has been developed to enable digital recording to Hi8
Digital8 video cassette.
syst e m ” ?
/
The recording time when you use your Digital8 system camcorder on Hi8
/
standard 8 mm tape is half the recording time when using the conventional
Hi8 / standard 8 mm system camcorder. (120 minutes of recording time becomes
60 minutes in the SP mode.)
Wh a t is t h e “ Hi8
syst e m ” ?
This Hi8
system is an extension of the standard 8 mm system, and was
developed to produce higher quality pictures.
You cannot play back a tape recorded in the Hi8
system correctly on video
recorders/ players other than a Hi8 video recorder/ player.
237
Ab o u t vid e o ca sse t t e
Co p yrig h t sig n a l
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck
If the tape you play back on your camcorder contains copyright signals, you cannot
copy it with another video camera recorder connected to your camcorder.
Wh e n yo u re co rd
You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals
for copyright protection of software.
The COPY INHIBIT indicator appears on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder or on the
TV screen if you try to record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright
control signals on the tape when it records.
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck a d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e
Wh e n yo u u se a t a p e re co rd e d in t h e Dig it a l8
syst e m
When you play back a Digital8 system tape which is dubbed from a dual sound track
tape recorded in the DV system, set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu
settings (p. 214).
Sound from speaker
HiFi Sound
Mode
Playing back
a stereo tape
Playing back a dual
sound track tape
STEREO
Stereo
Lch
Main sound and sub sound
Main sound
1
2
Rch
Sub sound
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.
Wh e n yo u u se a t a p e re co rd e d in t h e Hi8
syst e m
/st a n d a rd 8 m m
When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in an AFM HiFi stereo system,
set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 214).
Sound from speaker
HiFi Sound
Mode
Playing back
a stereo tape
Playing back a dual
sound track tape
STEREO
Stereo
Main sound and sub sound
Main sound
1
2
Monaural
Unnatural Sound
Sub sound
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.
238
Ab o u t vid e o ca sse t t e
Display during automatic detection of system
The Digital8 system or Hi8 / standard 8 mm system is automatically detected,
and the playback system is automatically switched to. During switching of systems, the
screen turns blue, and the following displays appear on the screen. A hissing noise also
sometimes can be heard.
t
/
: During switching from Digital8 to Hi8
/ standard 8 mm
/
t
: During switching from Hi8 / standard 8 mm to Digital8
239
Ab o u t t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile IC recording medium with a
data capacity that exceeds the capacity of a floppy disk.
In addition to exchanging data between “Memory Stick” compatible equipment, you
can also use a “Memory Stick” to store data as a type of detachable external recording
media.
There are two types of “Memory Stick”: an ordinary “Memory Stick” and a “MagicGate
Memory Stick” that is equipped with the MagicGate * copyright protection technology.
You can use both types of “Memory Stick” with your camcorder. However, because
your camcorder does not support the MagicGate standards, data recorded with your
camcorder is not subject to MagicGate copyright protection.
In addition, you can also use “Memory Stick Duo” with your camcorder.
* MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology.
• You cannot record or delete images when the write-protect tab is set to LOCK.
The position or the shape of the write-protect tab may differ depending on the
“Memory Stick” you use.
Terminal
Write-protect
tab
Labeling position
• Do not remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the camcorder while reading or
writing data.
• Data may be damaged in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or noise.
• We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of your computer.
• Do not attach any other material than the supplied label on the labeling position.
• When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” put it in the case supplied with it.
• Do not touch the terminal of a “Memory Stick” with your hand or a metal object.
• Do not strike, bend or drop a “Memory Stick.”
• Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory Stick.”
• Do not expose the “Memory Stick” to water.
• Do not use or keep the “Memory Stick” under the following conditions:
– High temperature locations such as in a car parked in direct sunlight
– Locations exposed to direct sunlight
– Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances
240
Ab o u t t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”
No t e s o n u sin g “ Me m o ry St ick Du o ” (o p t io n a l)
• When using a “Memory Stick Duo” with your camcorder, be sure to insert the
“Memory Stick Duo” into a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor.
• Make sure that a “Memory Stick Duo” is inserted facing the proper direction.
Inserting a “Memory Stick Duo” facing the wrong direction may damage the
equipment.
• Do not insert a “Memory Stick Duo” without a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor into
“Memory Stick” compatible equipment, as this may cause equipment trouble.
241
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck
Wh a t is t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck?
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for
communicating information related to operating conditions between your camcorder
and an AC Adaptor/ charger (optional).
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the
operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in
minutes. Estimated operating time and charging completion time are also displayed.
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
• Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.
• We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until the charge lamp goes off. If you charge the battery outside
of this temperature range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery.
• After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your
camcorder or remove the battery pack.
Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
• Battery pack performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time
that the battery pack can be used is shorter in cold places. We recommend the
following to ensure longer battery pack use:
– Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder
immediately before you start taking shots.
– Use the large-capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM90/ FM91/
QM91/ QM91D, optional).
• Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently operating playback, fast-forward or
rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large-capacity
battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D, optional).
• Be sure to turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) when not taking shots or playing
back on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is
in the standby mode or playback is paused.
• Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,
and make a trial recordings before taking the actual recording.
• Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r
• If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the
battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that
the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that
the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is
frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate
shooting time.
• The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes
depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even
if the remaining battery time is about five to 10 minutes.
242
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck
Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
• If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per
year to maintain proper function.
1. Fully charge the battery.
2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.
3. Remove the battery from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place.
• To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in the standby
mode until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.
Ba t t e ry life
• The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and
more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably,
a probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new
battery pack.
• The battery life varies according to how it is stored, operating conditions and
environment for each battery pack.
243
Ab o u t i.LINK
The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV jack. This section describes the
i.LINK standard and its features.
Wh a t is “ i.LINK” ?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other
data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling
other equipment.
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible
applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy
chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that
this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected
equipment.
Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the
characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations
and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.
Note
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK
cable. When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more
i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the operating instructions of the equipment to be
connected.
Ab o u t t h e n a m e “ i.LINK”
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by Sony, and
is a trademark approved by many corporations.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers.
i.LINK b a u d ra t e
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud
rates are defined:
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the operating instructions of each
equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment.
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is
“S100.”
When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the
baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.
* What is “Mbps”?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received
in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data
can be sent in one second.
244
Ab o u t i.LINK
i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it
For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having
DV jacks, see page 96 and 121.
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV) compatible non-video equipment
made by Sony (e.g. VAIO series computer).
Before connecting this unit to a computer, make sure that application software
supported by this unit is already installed on the computer.
For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating
instructions of the equipment to be connected.
Re q u ire d i.LINK ca b le
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).
245
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d
You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC Adaptor supplied with
your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz.
When charging the battery pack, use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if
necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet [b ].
AC-L15A/L15B
[a ]
[b ]
Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback
picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with VIDEO/ AUDIO input jack.
The following shows TV color systems used overseas.
NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela,
etc.
PAL system
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,
United Kingdom etc.
PAL-M system
Brazil
PAL-N system
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
SECAM system
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y t im e d iffe re n ce
You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD
TIME in the menu settings. See page 222 for more information.
246
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d
p re ca u t io n s
Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may
condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state,
the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not
operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the
% indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is
inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not
appear.
If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d
None of the functions except cassette ejection (
OPEN/ EJECT) work while the alarm
indicator is on. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one
hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again if the %
indicator does not flash.
Note on moisture condensation
Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm
place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:
– You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating
device.
– You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place
outside.
– You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.
– You use your camcorder in a place of high temperature or humidity.
How to prevent moisture condensation
When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your
camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature
inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).
247
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n
Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d s
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads.
If the below problem [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the
Sony V8-25CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above problem
persists, repeat cleaning.
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].
When you playback/record in the Digital8
system
The video heads may be dirty when:
– Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.
– Playback pictures do not move.
– Playback pictures are hardly visible.
– Playback pictures do not appear.
– The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another.
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
When you play back in the Hi8
/Standard 8 mm system
The video heads may be dirty when:
– The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another
on the screen or the x indicator flashes on the screen.
– Playback pictures contain noise.
– Playback pictures are hardly visible.
– Playback pictures do not appear.
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n
If fingerprints or dust makes the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the LCD
Cleaning Kit (optional) to clean the LCD screen.
248
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Notes
• Store your camcorder with the cassette removed from it when you do not use it for
an extended period of time.
• Clean the heads with an optional head cleaner (cleaning cassette) before important
recording or when playback image or sound is distorted.
• When the playback pictures still contain noise even if you have cleaned the video
heads with a cleaning cassette, the video heads may have worn down due to long use.
If this is the case, they must be replaced with new heads. Contact your Sony dealer or
local authorized Sony service facility.
Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry
Your camcorder is supplied with a built-in rechargeable battery installed to retain the
date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The built-in
rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The
battery, however, will become discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder.
It will be completely discharged in about three months if you do not use your
camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not
affect camcorder operation. To retain the date, time, and other information, charge the
battery if the battery is discharged.
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:
– Connect your camcorder to wall outlet using the AC Adaptor supplied with your
camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more
than 24 hours.
– Or, install a fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder
with the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.
Pre ca u t io n s
Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n
• Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC Adaptor).
• For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating
instructions.
• If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.
• Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.
• Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.
• Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so
might cause heat to build up inside.
• Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.
• Do not touch the LCD screen with your fingers or a sharp-pointed object.
• If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the screen.
This is not a malfunction.
• While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a
malfunction.
249
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Bu ilt -in lig h t
• Do not knock or jolt the built-in light while it is turned on as it may damage the bulb
or shorten the life of the bulb.
• Do not leave the built-in light on while it is resting on or against something; it may
cause a fire or damage the built-in light.
On h a n d lin g t a p e s
• Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are
used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.
• Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.
• Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with
a soft cloth.
Ca m co rd e r ca re
• Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and
1)
VCR/ PLAYER sections and play back a tape for a certain period * when your
2)
camcorder is not to be used for a long time.*
• Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,
remove them with a soft cloth.
• Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with
a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the
finish.
• Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause
your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.
Co n n e ct io n t o yo u r co m p u t e r
When inputting the image recorded by Hi8
/standard 8 mm system into
Sony VAIO
The Program Capture function of DVgate motion does not work. To use this function,
dub the image into a Digital8 or DV tape first, and then input it into your Sony VAIO.
Co n n e ct io n t o yo u r co m p u t e r
When recording an image processed or edited by your computer with the i.LINK cable,
use a new Hi8
/ Digital8 tape.
1)
* three minutes:
five minutes:
2)
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).
250
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
AC Ad a p t o r
• Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using it for a long time. To
disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.
• Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or
damaged.
• Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage
the cord and may cause fire or electric shock.
• Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the
connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.
• Always keep metal contacts clean.
• Do not disassemble the unit.
• Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.
• While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers
and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and
video operation.
• The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Do not place the unit in locations that are:
– Extremely hot or cold
– Dusty or dirty
– Very humid
– Vibrating
Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s
• Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instances:
– When there are fingerprints on the lens surface
– In hot or humid locations
– When the lens is used in environments susceptible to salt such as the seaside
• Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.
To prevent mold from occurring, periodically perform the above.
We recommend turning on and operating your camcorder about once per month to
keep your camcorder in an optimum state for a long time.
Re ch a rg e a b le Ba t t e ry Pa ck
• Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.
• To prevent accidental short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact
with the rechargeable battery terminals.
• Keep the Rechargeable Battery Pack away from fire.
• Never expose the Rechargeable Battery Pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such
as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.
• Keep the Rechargeable Battery Pack in a cool, dry place.
• Do not expose the Rechargeable Battery Pack to any mechanical shock.
• Do not disassemble or modify the Rechargeable Battery Pack.
• Attach the Rechargeable Battery Pack to the video equipment securely.
• Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.
251
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
No t e s o n d ry b a t t e rie s
To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:
– Be sure to insert the batteries with the + and – correctly matching the + and – inside
the battery compartment.
– Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
– Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.
– Do not use different types of batteries.
– Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.
– Do not use leaking batteries.
If batteries are leaking
• Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.
• If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.
• If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a
doctor.
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.
252
Sp e cifica t io n s
Vid e o ca m e ra re co rd e r
System
Video
recording
system
2 rotary heads
Helical scanning
FM system
2 rotary heads
Helical scanning system
Audio
recording
system
Rotary heads, FM system
Rotary heads, PCM system
Quantization: 12bits (Fs 32 kHz, stereo 1, stereo 2), 16bits
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)
Video signal
NTSC color, EIA standards
8 mm video format cassette
Usable cassette
Recording/
SP mode: 2 hours
LP mode: 4 hours
SP mode: 1 hour
LP mode: 1 hour and 30 minutes
playback time
(using 120 min.
Hi8/Digital8
video cassette)
Fastforw ard/
rew ind time
Approx. 5 min.
(using 120 min.
Hi8/Digital8
video cassette)
View finder
Electric Viewfinder (monochrome)
3 mm (1/ 6 type) CCD (Charge Coupled Device)
Gross: Approx. 460 000 pixels
Effective: Approx. 290 000 pixels
Image device
3 mm (1/ 6 type) CCD
(Charge Coupled Device)
Gross:
Approx. 320 000 pixels
Effective:
Approx. 200 000 pixels
Lens
Combined power zoom lens
Filter diameter 37 mm (1 7/ 16 in.)
20× (Optical), 560× (Digital)
20× (Optical), 700× (Digital)
Focal length
f = 2.5 - 50 mm (1/ 8 - 2 in.)
When converted to a 35 mm still camera
f = 42 - 840 mm (1 11/ 16 - 33 1/ 8 in.)
Color
temperature
Auto
Minimum
illumination
1 lx (lux) (F 1.6)
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*
4 lx (lux) (F 1.6)
* Objects unable to be seen due to the dark can be shot with infrared lighting.
(continued on the following page)
253
Sp e cifica t io n s
Input/
output
connectors
S video jack
Output
Input/ Output
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms),
unbalanced
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,
75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced
Chrominance signal: 0.286
Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms),
unbalanced
4-pin mini DIN
4-pin mini DIN
Audio/Video
jack
Output
Input/ Output
AV MINIJACK,
AV MINIJACK, VIDEO:
VIDEO: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced, sync negative 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω (ohms),
AUDIO: 327 mV, (at output impedance more than
47 kΩ (kilohms))
Input impedance with more than 47 kΩ (kilohms)
Output impedance with less than 2.2 kΩ (kilohms)
unbalanced, sync negative
AUDIO: 327 mV, (at
output impedance more
than 47 kΩ (kilohms))
Input impedance with
more than 47 kΩ (kilohms)
Output impedance with
less than 2.2 kΩ (kilohms)
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)
Monaural minijack
(ø 3.5 mm)
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)
—
RFU DC OUT
Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm),
DC5V
—
MIC jack
DV jack
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)
Stereo minijack (ø 2.5 mm)
—
4-pin connector
mini-B
USB jack
LANC jack
Picture
—
—
LCD screen
General
6.2 cm (2.5 type), 50.3 × 37.4 mm (2 × 1 1/ 2 in.)
61 600 (280 × 220)
Total dot
number
123 200 (560 × 220)
Pow er
requirements
7.2 V (Rechargeable Battery Pack)
8.4 V (AC Adaptor)
Average pow er During camera recording
During camera recording
using LCD
3.5 W
During camera recording
using viewfinder
2.7 W
During camera recording
using LCD
3.8 W
During camera recording
using viewfinder
2.9 W
consumption
(w hen using
the battery
pack)
using LCD
2.6 W
During camera recording
using viewfinder
1.9 W
Operating
temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Recommended
charging
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
temperature
Storage
temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Dimensions
(approx.)
89 × 101 × 199 mm (3 5/ 8 × 4 × 7 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)
Mass (approx.)
800 g (1 lb 12 oz) (main
unit only)
810 g (1 lb 12 oz) (main
unit only)
830 g (1 lb 13 oz)
(main unit only)
940 g (2 lb 1 oz)
(including the
950 g (2 lb 1 oz)
(including the
970 g (2 lb 2 oz)
(including the
Rechargeable Battery Pack Rechargeable Battery Pack Rechargeable Battery Pack
NP-FM30, Hi8/ Digital8
cassette, lens cap, and
shoulder strap)
NP-FM30, Hi8/ Digital8
cassette, lens cap, and
shoulder strap)
NP-FM30, Hi8/ Digital8
cassette, lens cap, and
shoulder strap)
Supplied
accessories
See page 9.
254
Sp e cifica t io n s
AC Ad a p t o r AC-L15A/L15B
Re ch a rg e a b le Ba t t e ry Pa ck
NP-FM30
Pow er
requirements
100 - 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz
0.35 - 0.18 A
Maximum
output voltage
DC 8.4 V
Current
consumption
Output voltage
Capacity
DC 7.2 V
Pow er
18 W
5.0 Wh (700 mAh)
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
consumption
Operating
Output voltage
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the
operating mode
temperature
Dimensions
(approx.)
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.) (w/ h/ d)
Operating
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
temperature
Mass (approx.)
Type
65 g (2.3 oz)
Storage
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Lithium ion
temperature
Dimensions
(approx.)
56 × 31 × 100 mm
(2 1/ 4 × 1 1/ 4 × 4 in.) (w/ h/ d)
excluding projecting parts
“ Me m o ry St ick”
Mass (approx.)
190 g (6.7 oz)
excluding power cord
Memory
Flash memory
8MB: MSA-8A
Operating
voltage
2.7 - 3.6 V
Pow er
consumption
Approx. 45 mA during operation
Approx. 130 µA in the standby
mode
Dimensions
(approx.)
50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm
(2 × 1/ 8 × 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)
Mass (approx.)
4 g (0.14 oz)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
255
— Qu ick Re fe re n ce —
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
Ca m co rd e r
5
1
6
7
2
3
8
9
0
4
1 Lens cap (p. 30)
6 BATT (battery) release lever (p. 18)
2 LCD screen (p. 30)
7 POWER sw itch (p. 30)
8 START/STOP button (p. 30)
9 Hooks for shoulder strap
0 DC IN jack (p. 19)
3 OPEN button (p. 30)
4 VOLUME –/+ * button (p. 45)
5 Rechargeable Battery Pack (p. 18)
* This button has a tactile dot.
Attaching the shoulder strap
Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder
strap.
256
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
LIGHT BATT INFO REW
PLAY
REC
FF
qk
ql
COLOR SLOW S
SUPER NS
qa
qs
qd
qf
STOP
PAUSE
w;
wa
ws
wd
qg
qh
wf
qj
2)
qa BATT INFO (p. 20)
qk Video control buttons * (p. 45, 49)
x STOP (stop)
1)
qs SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S button *
m REW (rewind)
(p. 39)
N PLAY (playback)
M FF (fast-forward)
X PAUSE (pause)
qd LIGHT button (p. 79)
qf Lens
2) 3)
ql Rec buttons * *
qg Microphone
z REC (recording)
qh Camera recording lamp (p. 30)
qj Infrared rays emitter (p. 39)
w; NIGHTSHOT sw itch (p. 39)
2)
wa FADER button * (p. 61)
ws BACK LIGHT button (p. 38)
wd FOCUS button (p. 71)
4)
wf Remote sensor *
1)
*
2)
* This button has a tactile dot.
3)
*
4)
*
257
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
MEMORY
MIX
MEMORY
PLAY
DELETE MPEG
INDEX
wj
wk
wl
e;
wg
wh
wg RESET button (p. 230)
wk DISPLAY button (p. 47)
1) 2)
1)
wh EDITSEARCH button * * (p. 43)
wl MENU button * (p. 210)
2)
wj MEMORY operation buttons *
e; SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 210)
MEMORY PLAY button (p. 163)
MEMORY – button (p. 163)
MEMORY + button (p. 163)
MEMORY MIX button (p. 141)
MEMORY DELETE button (p. 177)
MPEG NX button (p. 166)
MEMORY INDEX button (p. 165)
Attaching the lens cap
Attach the lens cap to the grip strap as illustrated.
1)
* This button has a tactile dot.
2)
*
258
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
CCD-TRV418
ea
es
ed
ea DATE button * (p. 42)
es TIME button * (p. 42)
ed COUNTER RESET button * (p. 31)
*
259
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
ef
el
eg
eh
r;
ra
ej
rs
rd
ek
3)
ef Pow er zoom lever (p. 34)
el PHOTO button * (p. 53, 56, 132)
1)
eg EXPOSURE button (p. 70)
r; “Memory Stick” slot * (p. 127)
1)
1)
eh PB ZOOM button * (p. 87, 172)
ra
Access lamp * (p. 127)
2)
EASY DUB button * (p. 98)
rs CHG lamp (p. 19)
ej Speaker
rd END SEARCH button (p. 43, 49)
ek TITLE button (p. 75)
1)
*
2)
*
3)
*
260
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
rf
rg
rj
rk
rh
rf View finder (p. 35)
rg LOCK sw itch * (p. 30)
rh Grip strap
rk
LANC jack (blue) *
LANC stands for Local Application
Control Bus System. The LANC control
jack is used for controlling the tape
transport of video equipment and other
peripherals connected to the video
equipment. This jack has the same
function as the jack indicated as
CONTROL L or REMOTE.
rj MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack (red) *
Connect an external microphone
(optional). This jack also accepts a
“plug-in-power” microphone.
Fastening the grip strap
Fasten the grip strap firmly.
*
261
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
ta
rl
t;
ts
td
rl Eyecup
ts Tripod receptacle (base)
Make sure that the length of the tripod
screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/ 32 in.).
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod
securely and the screw may damage
your camcorder.
t; View finder lens adjustment lever
(p. 35)
ta
OPEN/EJECT sw itch (p. 28)
td Cassette compartment (p. 28)
262
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
th
tj
tf
tg
tk tl y;
1)
2)
tf S VIDEO or S VIDEO OUT jack *
tj (USB) jack * (p. 183, 185)
(p. 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208)
3)
tk S VIDEO OUT * (p. 51, 95)
1)
tg AUDIO/VIDEO or A/V OUT jack *
3)
tl A/V OUT * (p. 51, 95)
(p. 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208)
3)
y; RFU DC OUT * (p. 52)
1)
th DV jack *
(p. 96, 121, 139, 153, 184, 208)
The DV jack is i.LINK compatible.
1)
*
2)
*
3)
*
263
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r
The buttons that share the same name on the Remote Commander and your camcorder
function identically.
6
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
8
q;
8
9
0
5
2
RMT-814
RMT-708
1 PHOTO button (p. 53, 56, 132)
2 DISPLAY button (p. 47)
7 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 89, 124)
8 START/STOP button (p. 30)
9 DATA CODE button (p. 47)
3 SEARCH MODE button (p. 90, 92)
4 ./> buttons (p. 90, 92)
5 Video control buttons (p. 45, 49)
0 Pow er zoom button (p. 34)
6 Transmitter
Point toward the remote sensor to
control the camcorder after turning on
the camcorder.
To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r
Insert 2 size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and – polarities on the batteries to
the + – marks inside the battery compartment.
RMT-708
RMT-814
Notes on the Remote Commander
• Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.
• Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. The commander modes
1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid
unintentional operations. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode
VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the
VCR with black paper.
264
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs
LCD scre e n a n d Vie w fin d e r
1
qd
qf
qg
qh
2
SP
0:00:00
REC
50min
3
W
T
M.FADER
16:9WIDE
SEPIA
4
5
6
7
ZERO SET
MEMORY
DATE 01
SEARCH
qj
qk
ql
w;
wa
A/V DV
16B I T
1 0 1 – 0 0 0
1
8
9
q;
qa
qs
ws
wd
wf
1 Recording mode (p. 36)
Mirror mode
qa SteadyShot off
(p. 213)
(p. 35)
qs Manual focusing (p. 71)
2 Format (p. 36)
,
or indicator appears.
qd Self-timer indicator
(p. 41, 55, 135, 149)
3 Remaining battery time (p. 36)
4 Zoom (p. 34)
qf STBY/REC (p. 30)
Video control mode (p. 49)
Exposure (p. 70)
Image size
(p. 130)
(p. 128)
5 Fader (p. 61)
Image quality
Digital effect
(p. 65, 85)
(p. 140)
qg Tape counter (p. 36)
MEMORY MIX
Time code
(p. 36)
6 Wide mode (p. 58)
FRAME indicator
(p. 132)
(p. 47)
Self-diagnosis display (p. 232)
7 Picture effect (p. 64, 83)
8 Volume (p. 45)
Data code
Tape Photo recording
(p. 56)
Memory Photo recording
(p. 132)
9 PROGRAM AE (p. 68)
0 Backlight (p. 38)
Image number
(p. 164)
265
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
qh Remaining tape (p. 36)
w; A/V t DV
DV IN
(p. 208)
(p. 122)
(p. 132)
qj ZERO SET MEMORY
(p. 89, 124)
Current folder
FRAME REC indicator
wa Audio mode
(p. 74)
(p. 219)
INTERVAL TAPE indicator
1)
Data file name *
(p. 164, 168)
(p. 73)
INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator
Time (p. 36)
Auto date
(p. 154)
(p. 221)
qk END SEARCH (p. 43, 49)
ws Warning (p. 233)
DATE SEARCH
wd Camera recording lamp (p. 30)
(p. 90)
This indicator appears in the viewfinder.
PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN
wf Built-in light (p. 79)
(p. 92)
2)
Video flash mode *
ql NIGHTSHOT (p. 39)
(p. 211)
SUPER NIGHTSHOT
(p. 39)
2)
Flash *
COLOR SLOW SHUTTER
(p. 40)
1)
* This indicator appears when MEMORY MIX works.
2)
* This indicator appears when you use the video flash light (optional).
266
In d e x
A, B
I, J, K, L
i.LINK ...................................... 244
i.LINK cable ..... 96, 121, 139, 153,
184, 208, 245
R
AC Adaptor .............................. 19
Adjusting viewfinder lens ...... 35
AFM HiFi Sound .................... 238
AUDIO MIX ........................... 214
AUDIO MODE ....................... 219
AUTO SHTR ........................... 211
A/ V connecting cable
........... 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208
BACK LIGHT ........................... 38
BATTERY INFO ....................... 20
Battery pack .............................. 18
BEEP ........................................ 222
BOUNCE ................................... 61
Built-in light ............................. 79
Recording folder .................... 162
Recording time ......................... 22
Recording/ Playback system
............................................... 237
Rec Review ............................... 43
Remaining battery time
indicator ........................... 36, 48
Remaining tape indicator ....... 36
Remote Commander ............. 264
Remote sensor ........................ 257
RESET ...................................... 230
ID-1 system ............................... 60
ID-2 system ............................... 60
Image protection .................... 176
Image quality mode .............. 128
Image size ............................... 130
Index screen ............................ 165
“InfoLITHIUM” battery ....... 242
Infrared rays emitter
......................... 39, 102, 109, 257
Insert editing .......................... 123
Interval recording .................... 72
Interval Photo recording
S
Self-diagnosis display ........... 232
Self-timer recording
............................................... 154
JPEG ......................................... 126
LANC jack .............................. 261
LUMINANCE KEY ................. 65
C, D
........................... 41, 55, 135, 149
Shoulder strap ........................ 256
Signal convert function ......... 208
Skip scan ................................... 49
SLIDE SHOW ......................... 174
SLOW SHUTTER ..................... 65
STEADYSHOT ....................... 213
Stereo tape .............................. 238
STILL ......................................... 65
STRIPE....................................... 61
Sub sound ....................... 214, 238
SUPER NIGHTSHOT .............. 39
S VIDEO jack
Camera chroma key .............. 140
Charging battery ...................... 19
Charging built-in rechargeable
battery .................................. 249
Cleaning cassette indicator
............................................... 248
Clock set .................................... 26
Color Slow Shutter .................. 40
Data code .................................. 47
Date search ............................... 90
DEMO ...................................... 221
DIGITAL EFFECT ............. 65, 85
Digital8 system ...................... 237
Digital program editing
M, N
Main sound ..................... 214, 238
Manual focus ............................ 71
Memory chroma key ............. 140
Memory luminance key ........ 140
MEMORY MIX ....................... 140
Memory overlap .................... 140
Memory PB ZOOM ............... 172
Memory photo recording ..... 132
“Memory Stick” ............. 126, 240
“Memory Stick” recording
capacity ................................ 131
Menu settings ......................... 210
Mirror mode ............................. 35
Moisture condensation ......... 247
Monaural............. 52, 95, 120, 152
MONOTONE ........................... 61
M.FADER .................................. 61
MPEG ...................................... 126
MPEG movie recording ........ 146
New folder .............................. 160
NIGHTSHOT ........................... 39
NTSC system .......................... 246
........... 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208
....................................... 106, 156
DISPLAY ................................... 47
DNR ......................................... 214
DOT ........................................... 61
Dual sound track tape ........... 238
T, U, V
Tape counter ............................. 36
Tape PB ZOOM ........................ 87
Tape photo recording .............. 56
TBC .......................................... 214
Time code .................................. 37
Title ...................................... 75, 77
TRAIL ........................................ 65
Transition .................................. 31
TV color systems .................... 246
USB jack .......................... 183, 185
USB Streaming ....................... 197
E
Easy Dubbing ........................... 98
EDITSEARCH .......................... 43
END SEARCH .................... 43, 49
Exif ........................................... 126
Exposure ................................... 70
F, G, H
W, X, Y, Z
O, P, Q
FADER ...................................... 61
Fade in/ out ............................... 61
FLASH MOTION ..................... 65
FOCUS....................................... 71
Format ..................................... 218
Frame recording ....................... 74
Full charge ................................ 20
Grip strap ................................ 261
Heads ....................................... 248
HiFi SOUND .......................... 214
Hi8/ standard 8 mm system
Warning indicators ................ 233
Warning message .................. 236
Wide-angle ............................... 34
Wide mode ............................... 58
WIPE .......................................... 61
WORLD TIME ........................ 222
Write-protect tab .............. 29, 240
Zero set memory ..................... 89
Zoom ......................................... 34
OLD MOVIE ............................. 65
Operation indicators ............. 265
ORC ......................................... 219
OVERLAP ................................. 61
PB folder ................................. 169
Photo scan ................................. 93
Photo search ............................. 92
PICTURE EFFECT ............. 64, 83
Picture search ........................... 49
Playback pause ......................... 49
Playing time .............................. 23
Print mark ............................... 180
PROGRAM AE ........................ 68
............................................... 237
267
Printed on 100% recycled paper using
VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)-free
vegetable oil based ink.
Printed in Japan
|
Yorkville Sound Car Amplifier NX720S User Manual
Westcott 1862 User Manual
Tekkeon DVP5960 User Manual
Specialized AFR S90 User Manual
SoundMax SM CDM1041 User Manual
Sony TCM 333 User Manual
Sony DVW 709WS User Manual
Sony Camera Accessories CA 570P User Manual
Sharp Business Wallet Calculator EL480SRB User Manual
Samsung Car Satellite TV System 8000 User Manual